annexure - d techinical specification - civil - WorleyParsons.com
annexure - d techinical specification - civil - WorleyParsons.com
annexure - d techinical specification - civil - WorleyParsons.com
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
ANNEXURE - D<br />
TECHINICAL SPECIFICATION - CIVIL<br />
DOC NO: 9000043-HD-10129 (0435-JH0902-00-PP-RFQ-0019 )
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
CONTENT LIST- CIVIL<br />
Guru Gobind Singh Refinery Products<br />
Evacuation Project (GGSRPEP)<br />
Raman Mandi- Bahadurgarh and Raman Mandi-<br />
Bhatinda Multiproduct Pipeline<br />
CONTENT LIST - CIVIL<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002<br />
20 July 09<br />
Sanghi Oxygen Compound<br />
1, Mahal Industrial Estate<br />
Mahakali Caves Road<br />
Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400 093 India<br />
Phone: +91-22-67818000<br />
Fax : +91-22-67818080<br />
www.worleyparsons.<strong>com</strong><br />
© Copyright 2009 <strong>WorleyParsons</strong><br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002 Page 1 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
CONTENT LIST- CIVIL<br />
SYNOPSIS<br />
Disclaimer<br />
This report has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive use of Hindustan Petroleum<br />
Corporation Limited (HPCL), and is subject to and issued in accordance with the agreement<br />
between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) and <strong>WorleyParsons</strong>.<br />
<strong>WorleyParsons</strong> accepts no liability or responsibility whatsoever for it in respect of any use of or<br />
reliance upon this report by any third party.<br />
Copying this report without the permission of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) or<br />
<strong>WorleyParsons</strong> is not permitted.<br />
PROJECT 435/JH0902 - HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREPARED<br />
BY<br />
CHECKED<br />
BY<br />
APPROVED<br />
BY<br />
DATE<br />
CLIENT<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
A<br />
Issued for IDC<br />
S. Saxena V. Thorat J. Wallace<br />
20-July 09<br />
N/A<br />
B<br />
Issued for<br />
Review S. Saxena V. Thorat J. Wallace<br />
20-July-09<br />
11-Sep-<br />
09<br />
C<br />
Issued for<br />
Tender S. Saxena V. Thorat KMNP<br />
20-Sep-09<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002 Page 2 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
CONTENT LIST- CIVIL<br />
CIVIL - LIST OF ATTCHMENTS<br />
Sr.<br />
Revisions<br />
No. Document Title Document No. Rev. & Date<br />
1 Scope of work<br />
2 Architectural Design Basis<br />
GENERAL<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-<br />
0002<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-BOD-<br />
0001<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. 0<br />
3 Civil/Structural Design Basis 0435-JH0902-CI-BOD-0001 Rev. 1<br />
SPECIFICATIONS<br />
4 Specifications for Doors & Windows<br />
5 Specifications for Flooring Work<br />
6<br />
Specifications for False Ceiling & False<br />
Flooring<br />
7 Specifications for Plumbing<br />
8 Specifications for Earthwork<br />
9 Specifications for Concrete Work<br />
10 Specifications for Masonry Work<br />
11 Specifications for Plastering Work<br />
12 Specifications for Painting Work<br />
13 Specifications for Roofing Work<br />
14 Specifications for Water Proofing<br />
15 Specifications for Roads & Paving<br />
16 Specifications for Drains<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-<br />
0001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-<br />
0002<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-<br />
0003<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-<br />
0004<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0002<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0003<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0004<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0005<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0006<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0007<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0008<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0009<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002 Page 3 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
CONTENT LIST- CIVIL<br />
17 Specifications for Cable Trench<br />
18 Specifications for Fencing<br />
19 Specifications for Miscellaneous Work<br />
20 Specification for Structural Steel Work<br />
21<br />
Specification for Painting to Structural<br />
Steel<br />
BILL OF QUANTITIES(BOQ)<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0010<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0011<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-<br />
0012<br />
0435-JH0902-00-ST-SPC-<br />
0001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-ST-SPC-<br />
0002<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
22 SOR for SV Station<br />
STANDARD DRAWINGS<br />
0435-JH0902-10-CI-SOR-<br />
0003<br />
Rev. B<br />
23 Standard Details (Architectural)<br />
24 Doors & Windows Schedule<br />
25 Doors & Windows Schedule<br />
26 General Notes - Concrete Work<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
Standard Drawings - Concrete Works<br />
(Sheet 1)<br />
Standard Drawings - Concrete Works<br />
(Sheet 2)<br />
Standard Drawings - Concrete Works<br />
(Sheet 3)<br />
30 Standard Details Of Paving<br />
31 Standard Details Of Roads<br />
32 Standard Details Of Storm Water Drain<br />
33 Standard Details Of Pipe Culvert<br />
34 Standard Details Of Fencing<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-DST-<br />
0001-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-DST-<br />
0001-002<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-DST-<br />
0001-003<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0001-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0002-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0002-002<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0002-003<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0003-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0004-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0005-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0006-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0007-001<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. A<br />
Rev. A<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002 Page 4 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
CONTENT LIST- CIVIL<br />
35 Standard Details Of Ms Gate<br />
36 Standard Details Of Pump Foundations<br />
37 Standard Details Of Pipe Sleeper<br />
38<br />
Standard Details Of Cable Trench &<br />
Covers<br />
39 Standard Details Of Cable Duct Bank<br />
40 Standard Details Of Manhole<br />
41 Standard Details Of Septic Tank<br />
42 Standard Details Of Soak Pit<br />
43 Standard Details Of Compound Wall<br />
44 General Notes - Steel Structures<br />
45 Standard Details Of Ladder<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0008-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0009-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0010-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0011-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0012-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0013-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0014-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0015-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-<br />
0017-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-ST-DST-<br />
0001-001<br />
0435-JH0902-00-ST-DST-<br />
0006-001<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. C<br />
Rev. C<br />
CIVIL DRAWINGS<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
Ground Floor Plan And Roof Plan-S. V.<br />
Station Bldg(Type-I)<br />
Architectural Elevations-S. V. Station<br />
Bldg(Type-I)<br />
Architectural Sections-S. V. Station<br />
Bldg(Type-I)<br />
Finishing Schedule-S. V. Station<br />
Bldg(Type-I)<br />
Ground Floor Plan And Roof Plan-S. V.<br />
Station Bldg(Type-II)<br />
Architectural Elevations-S. V. Station<br />
Bldg(Type-II)<br />
Architectural Sections-S. V. Station<br />
Bldg(Type-II)<br />
Finishing Schedule-S. V. Station<br />
Bldg(Type-Ii)<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0001-001<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0001-002<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0001-003<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0001-004<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0002-001<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0002-002<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0002-003<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-<br />
0002-004<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002 Page 5 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
CONTENT LIST- CIVIL<br />
54 General Civil Layout S.V. Stations (5 Nos)<br />
55<br />
56<br />
General Civil Layout S.V. Station (Option-<br />
1)(SV-04)<br />
General Civil Layout S.V. Station (Option-<br />
2)(SV-04)<br />
57 S. V. Station- Main Gate Typical Details<br />
0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-<br />
0001-001<br />
0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-<br />
0001-002<br />
0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-<br />
0001-003<br />
0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-<br />
0001-004<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
Rev. B<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM<br />
58 Quality Assurance System<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-<br />
0002<br />
Rev. C<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-LST-0002 Page 6 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL<br />
Guru Gobind Singh Refinery Products<br />
Evacuation Project (GGSRPEP)<br />
Raman Mandi- Bahadurgarh and Raman Mandi-<br />
Bhatinda Multiproduct Pipeline<br />
SCOPE OF WORK – CIVIL<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002<br />
20 July 09<br />
Sanghi Oxygen Compound<br />
1, Mahal Industrial Estate<br />
Mahakali Caves Road<br />
Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400 093 India<br />
Phone: +91-22-67818000<br />
Fax : +91-22-67818080<br />
www.worleyparsons.<strong>com</strong><br />
© Copyright 2009 <strong>WorleyParsons</strong><br />
435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002 Page 1 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL<br />
SYNOPSIS<br />
Disclaimer<br />
This report has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive use of Hindustan Petroleum<br />
Corporation Limited (HPCL), and is subject to and issued in accordance with the agreement<br />
between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) and <strong>WorleyParsons</strong>.<br />
<strong>WorleyParsons</strong> accepts no liability or responsibility whatsoever for it in respect of any use of or<br />
reliance upon this report by any third party.<br />
Copying this report without the permission of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) or<br />
<strong>WorleyParsons</strong> is not permitted.<br />
PROJECT 435/JH0902 - HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREPARED<br />
BY<br />
CHECKED<br />
BY<br />
APPROVED<br />
BY<br />
DATE<br />
CLIENT<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
A<br />
Issued for IDC<br />
S. Saxena V. Thorat J. Wallace<br />
20-July 09<br />
N/A<br />
B<br />
Issued for<br />
Review S. Saxena V. Thorat J. Wallace<br />
21-Aug-09<br />
11-Sep-<br />
09<br />
C<br />
Issued for<br />
Tender S. Saxena V. Thorat KMN Pillai<br />
24-Sept-09<br />
435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002 Page 2 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL<br />
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK<br />
The scope of work of this tender involves detailed engineering and preparation of<br />
drawings, bill of materials, equipment foundations, pipe supports, supply of all<br />
materials, construction, inspection, testing as per attached conceptual/ architectural<br />
drawings and layouts, schedule of rates, <strong>specification</strong>s and standards for all <strong>civil</strong><br />
works in six nos SV stations of Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh cross country pipeline<br />
and residual <strong>civil</strong> works of cross-country pipeline at Bahadurgarh.<br />
The scope of work mainly involves, but not limited, to the following.<br />
1. Clearing of proposed site from all debris, stripping of the area, removing<br />
vegetation, grass, shrubs, roots etc.<br />
2. Site Grading including earth filling.<br />
3. Complete Civil & structural work for Boundary wall, Fencing and Gates<br />
4. Construction of approach road including culverts from the nearest existing<br />
asphalted road to the respective SV stations.<br />
5. General <strong>civil</strong> works such as internal roads, paving, storm water drain, sanitary<br />
drain, contaminated/slop drain, rain water harvesting system and cable<br />
trenches.<br />
a) Approach road & internal road shall be asphalt road for SV station<br />
No. 03. For other SV stations (SV No. 01, 02, 04,05 & 06) the<br />
approach road shall be with concrete paver blocks.<br />
b) The approximate distance of the SV station plots from the nearest<br />
existing road are as indicated below.<br />
<br />
<br />
SV No 01, 02, 04,05 & 06 - approx. 15 meters.<br />
SV No 03 - approx. 100 meters.<br />
However the contractor shall verify the actual distances before quote<br />
for the bid.<br />
6. Wire Cage around Valve pits as per the photographs given below. Details<br />
shall be finalised in consultation with Engineer-incharge-<br />
435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002 Page 3 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL<br />
7. Complete structural work in RCC/Structural steel for pipe sleepers, pipe<br />
support, operating platforms, cross - overs, MOV, equipment foundations viz.<br />
Scrapper Launcher, Scrapper Receiver, DG Set etc. for the cross-country<br />
pipeline.<br />
8. Buildings including structure, plastering, painting, flooring, water-proofing,<br />
doors, windows, false ceiling, false flooring, roof sheeting, plinth protection,<br />
plumbing and sanitary works, ladders etc.<br />
9. Setting up of WORKSITE establishment and BIDDER’S facilities.<br />
435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002 Page 4 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL<br />
10. Removing temporary facilities and clearing site after <strong>com</strong>pletion of work.<br />
11. Repair of existing plant roads, if damaged due to new construction shall be<br />
repaired by contractors without any extra claim.<br />
12. Anti termite treatment of buildings.<br />
13. Topographical survey & Geotechnical investigations with minimum two no. of<br />
bore holes (at each SV station) & submission of report with re<strong>com</strong>mended<br />
SBC’s for <strong>civil</strong> work at SV station locations only. Geotech report for the<br />
pipeline will be supplied by owner.<br />
14. Any other work to <strong>com</strong>plete the job in all respect.<br />
15. Technical requirements for review of Design & AFC Drawings<br />
a) Submission of detailed design and drawings by the contractor & review of<br />
them by WP.<br />
b) No construction shall be taken up at site unless AFC drawings /<br />
documents incorporating WP <strong>com</strong>ments is available with the Engineer-incharge.<br />
c) Submission of bar bending schedules for all RCC works and fabrication<br />
drawings for structural works.<br />
d) Submission of “AS BUILT” drawings/details for all works<br />
16. Rain water harvesting system<br />
Bidder shall refer Specifications, General condition of contract and Special condition<br />
of contract.<br />
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY<br />
Scope of supply includes all material, consumables required to <strong>com</strong>plete the job. No<br />
free issue material by the owner.<br />
3.0 BUILDINGS<br />
All <strong>civil</strong> and architectural works for building such as excavation, foundations,<br />
columns, beams, slab, roofing, flooring, plastering, painting, doors/windows, terrace<br />
water proofing, rain water pipe, false flooring, false ceiling, plinth protection, ramps,<br />
expansion/construction joints, anti termite treatment, etc. shall be done by the<br />
contractor as per detailed <strong>specification</strong>s and approved construction drawings for<br />
a) SV station building for SV station no. 01, 02, 03,05 & 06 as per<br />
typical layout no. 0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-0001-001.<br />
435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002 Page 5 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL<br />
b) SV station buildings for SV station no. 04 as per typical layout no.<br />
0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-0001-002.<br />
(OR)<br />
Optional : If the optional item for land acquisition for SV No. 04 is<br />
operated then the SV station buildings details shall be as per drg. No.<br />
0435-JH0902-70-CI-DGA-0001-003.<br />
435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002 Page 6 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
DESIGN BASIS FOR ARCHITECTURAL<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-BOD-0001<br />
0 Issued for Implementation<br />
RD UDB AK<br />
08-05-09<br />
A Issued for Review<br />
RD UDB AK<br />
23-04-09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROV<br />
AL<br />
DATE<br />
Page 1 of 36
CONTENTS<br />
PART I - DESIGN PHILOSOPHY<br />
PART II - ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES<br />
Page 2 of 36
PART I - DESIGN PHILOSOPHY<br />
Page 3 of 36
1.0 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENT<br />
Architectural design shall be in accordance with the following clauses.<br />
1.1 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS<br />
Provisions of following references shall be taken care in architectural design.<br />
• National Building Code of India.<br />
• State Govt. Factory Acts.<br />
• Local Municipality or any other Authority’s Bye-laws as applicable.<br />
• TAC (Tariff Advisory Committee) Re<strong>com</strong>mendations.<br />
• BPE (Bureau of Public Enterprises) Guidelines.<br />
• Process Control Room Safety - OISD-STANDARD-163.<br />
• Any other rules/regulations/re<strong>com</strong>mendations as applicable for a particular project.<br />
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENT<br />
1.2.1 SPATIAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
Spatial requirements inside a building shall be decided based on activities to be performed in the<br />
building and consequent occupancy pattern equipment layout etc. Spaces can be generally<br />
classified as follows, which shall be provided in all the buildings/sheds.<br />
Functional Spaces<br />
Functional areas of any building/shed are constituted by the main activity areas for which the<br />
building is to exist. Various spaces/rooms shall be judiciously sized and shall be integrated logically<br />
to generate the total building plan taking into account the following parameters.<br />
• Activities, group of activities and consequent work-flow pattern.<br />
• Site conditions i.e. dimensions, contours etc.<br />
• Climatic conditions vis-a-vis orientation.<br />
• Safety r e gul ations.<br />
• Lighting and ventilation.<br />
• A c o u s t i c s .<br />
• S e r v i c e s .<br />
• S e c u r i t y .<br />
• E c o n o m y .<br />
• A e s t h e t i c s .<br />
Page 4 of 36
• Any specific requirement pertaining to particular buildings.<br />
• All other established Architectural design parameters.<br />
The objective of spatial arrangement shall be to satisfy functional requirements and physical <strong>com</strong>fort<br />
and safety regulations as well as aesthetics which has significant role in creating a favourable<br />
working and living condition.<br />
Circulation Spaces<br />
Following spaces are classified as circulation spaces. These spaces shall be provided for integrating<br />
various types of spaces and as means of access/exit.<br />
• C o r r i d o r s & p a s s a g e s .<br />
• S t a i r c a s e s .<br />
• E n t r a n c e l o b b y / F o y e r i n c l u d i n g R e c e p t i o n & w a i t i n g .<br />
• G a n g w a y / w a l k w a y s .<br />
• E q u i p m e n t l o a d i n g / u n l o a d i n g p l a t f o r m s .<br />
• E m e r g e n c y E x i t s .<br />
Amenity Spaces<br />
Following spaces are classified as amenity spaces.<br />
• T o i l e t ( G e n t s & L a d i e s ) .<br />
• D r i n k i n g W a t e r F a c i l i t y .<br />
Toilets & Drinking Water enclosure shall be mandatory requirement for buildings with human<br />
occupancy.<br />
Utility Spaces<br />
Utility spaces are the spaces requirement of which are generated due to provision of services like<br />
Air-conditioning, pressurisation, fire fighting, electrical, telephone etc. Following are the examples.<br />
These spaces shall be provided as per specified building services.<br />
• A i r - c o n d i t i o n i n g p l a n t r o o m .<br />
• A i r h a n d l i n g r o o m s .<br />
• E l e c t r i c a l d i s t r i b u t i o n p a n e l s r o o m s .<br />
• F i r e F i g h t i n g E q u i p m e n t r o o m .<br />
• T e l e p h o n e E x c h a n g e E q u i p m e n t s r o o m<br />
• U P S r o o m<br />
• B a t t e r y r o o m<br />
However following are the limiting sizes/dimensions for various purposes, which are to be adhered<br />
to.<br />
A. Minimum size of any habitable room = 9 sq.m with minimum dimensions<br />
not less than 2.5m.<br />
B. Minimum ht. of any habitable room = 3m which may be reduce to<br />
2.75m for air-conditioned areas.<br />
C. Maximum ht. of habitable rooms = 3.6m<br />
D. Scale of ac<strong>com</strong>modation for = @14cu.m. per occupant.<br />
Page 5 of 36
Industrial work spaces.<br />
Minimum clear height of such<br />
workspaces shall be 3 .6m.<br />
1.2.2 DAY LIGHTING AND NATURAL VENTILATION<br />
Day lighting<br />
Established level of illumination shall be maintained for all parts of the buildings by means of<br />
windows, sky lights etc. Following references shall be adhered to in this regard.<br />
Natural Ventilation<br />
National Building Code of India<br />
S t a t e F a c t o r y A c t<br />
Established level of ventilation in terms of air charges per hour shall be maintained for all<br />
spaces.<br />
Following references shall be adhered to for the purpose.<br />
A. National Building Code of India.<br />
B. State Factory Act<br />
Natural ventilation shall also be supplemented by mechanical or electrical means of ventilation<br />
in all human occupied areas.<br />
1.2.3 ACOUSTICS AND SOUND INSULATION<br />
Specified acceptable noise level and reverberation time shall be maintained inside a<br />
building/shed.<br />
Following references shall be referred to for the purpose:<br />
A. National Building Code of India<br />
B. S t a t e F a c t o r y A c t<br />
C. M O E F C l e a r a n c e d a t e d 2 9 - 0 4 - 0 9 i s s u e d f o r t h i s p r o j e c t .<br />
Required noise level in any space shall be maintained by means of:<br />
A. Segregating noise sources by buffer zones<br />
B. Dampening of noise levels by damping devices<br />
C. Providing Acoustic treatment with acoustic material (on walls, ceilings, floors,<br />
as required).<br />
1.2.4 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS<br />
Safety from fire and like emergencies shall be taken into account in building/shed design.<br />
Every building/shed meant for human occupancy shall be provided with exits sufficient to<br />
permit safe escape of occupants in case of emergency.<br />
The exits shall be in terms of doorway, corridors, and passageways to internal/external<br />
staircase or to areas having access to the outside.<br />
Page 6 of 36
Following references shall be adhered to in this regard:<br />
A. National Building Code of India.<br />
B. State Factor y Act.<br />
C. Stipulations of Collector NOC/ CCOE/ Advisor Safety.<br />
For Control Room safety requirements, provisions of OISD-STD- 163 shall be<br />
followed.<br />
1.2.5 SITE PLANNING<br />
Site planning of buildings shall take into account aspects like inter-relationship of the building<br />
with the whole system, movement pattern, traffic and road net-work, safety regulations, service<br />
network, fire safety, climatic and environmental aspects, site conditions like site dimension,<br />
contour, drainage, noise level, view, future expansion, visual aspects etc.<br />
Main and service/maintenance entrances of buildings shall be provided with vehicular access.<br />
All exit points also shall be provided with footpath/vehicular access. Parking space in<br />
accordance with traffic load shall be provided for all buildings. Road network and open space<br />
around the buildings shall be designed considering movement and functioning of Fire tenders.<br />
Climatic factors like wind direction, solar geometry shall be taken into account in orienting the<br />
buildings depending on type of climate. Orientation of building shall also consider noise and<br />
smell propagation, views, and visual effect from various directions.<br />
Sufficient open space shall be provided for planned expansion of buildings. Sufficient open<br />
space shall also be provided around the buildings for lighting and ventilation in accordance<br />
with Factory Acts & National Building Code.<br />
Site plan shall also take into account, landscaping aspects. The inherent characteristics of site,<br />
such as contours, land form, vegetation, trees, plants, shape shall be fully utilized in the<br />
design.<br />
1.2.6 BUILDING SERVICES<br />
Following services shall be provided for all buildings/sheds as essential services or as<br />
specified.<br />
Water supply, distribution and drainage, sanitary services.<br />
This service is essential for all human occupied bldgs/sheds. All buildings with human<br />
occupancy shall have provision of toilet and drinking water as per following references.<br />
A. National Building Code of India<br />
B. S t a t e F a c t o r y A c t<br />
Page 7 of 36
Drinking water provisions shall be provided within an enclosure separated from the toilets.<br />
Space for janitor shall be provided in the toilets. All service pipes showing on the external wall<br />
hall be suitably concealed or shall be provided within a shaft.<br />
Electrical Services<br />
This service shall be provided as essential service for all buildings/sheds. Electrical services<br />
for buildings shall consist of electrical supply and distributions, Electrical lighting installations,<br />
telephone network, fans, exhaust fans, lighting protection system etc. including all accessories,<br />
cabling etc.<br />
Air conditioning and heating<br />
Areas of Control room, spaces housing equipments/machinery/panels etc., which require<br />
conditioned environment and certain specified areas like offices, specific office ac<strong>com</strong>modation<br />
shall be air-conditioned.<br />
1.2.7 AESTHETICS<br />
Apart from the fulfilment of functional & safety requirement, aesthetic requirement of the<br />
building shall be taken care of in the design. As specific guidelines for achieving required<br />
aesthetics are difficult to establish, preliminary drawings indicating Architectural treatment shall<br />
be submitted for Owner’s approval. Elements like Canopies, overhangs & shading devices,<br />
gutters, door; Window/ Ventilator <strong>com</strong>position, External wall location with respect to columns,<br />
Colour Scheme, grooves in plaster etc. shall be considered as contributory elements to<br />
aesthetics and their design etc. shall be subjected to the Owner’s approval.<br />
1.2.8 STRUCTURAL AND CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS<br />
Type of structure & construction shall be as specified. However following table may be<br />
followed as a guideline.<br />
S.NO<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
3.<br />
BUILDING<br />
Control Room, Sub Station,<br />
D.G.room.<br />
Pump House, Watch tower, Fire<br />
Water pump house, Parking<br />
Shed & other sheds.<br />
Ware House<br />
TYPE OF STRUCTURE &<br />
CONSTRUCTION<br />
RCC column with brick masonry<br />
infill walls.<br />
Steel Structure, Steel truss and<br />
Precoated sheet roofing & cladding.<br />
RCC column with brick masonry<br />
infill walls, steel truss and<br />
precoated sheet roofing & cladding<br />
Page 8 of 36
1.2.9 BUILDING ELEMENTS<br />
Finished Floor Level (FFL)<br />
In general, FFL of the Buildings, sheds shall be determined with respect to top of approach<br />
road or pavement. Following schedule shall be adhered to for FFL of various buildings &<br />
sheds.<br />
A. Transformer bay - Top of approach Road level + 150mm<br />
B. Parking shed, Fire - Top of approach Road level + 150mm<br />
tender bays<br />
C. False floor areas or cavity - top of approach road level +600<br />
depth of cavity<br />
D. Material Loading, - Top of approach Road level + 1100mm<br />
Unloading Platforms<br />
E. Other areas - Top of approach Road level + 300<br />
to<br />
600mm<br />
F. Electrical Room - Top of approach Road level +<br />
1000mm<br />
or as specified depending on<br />
cable trench depth.<br />
Notes:<br />
A. In case of approaches with different top levels, the highest top level of<br />
approach road/pavement shall be considered.<br />
B. FFL shall be same throughout in a building/shed. Split-levels may be<br />
considered in exceptional cases due to ground terrain etc. or if any<br />
functional requirement.<br />
C. FFL of external loading/unloading bays/platforms, toilet, shall be 6 - 12<br />
mm lower than that of the building/shed’s FFL to check ingress/spillage<br />
of water.<br />
Page 9 of 36
2.0 STEPS/RAMPS<br />
Steps/ramps shall be provided for access to the buildings/sheds for pedestrian/vehicular, equipment<br />
entry. Minimum 1000 mm wide platform shall be provided in between Entrance door and<br />
steps/ramps. Following dimensions of the steps/ramps shall be adhered to.<br />
A.<br />
minimum<br />
Tread = 250 mm<br />
B.<br />
maximum<br />
Riser = 175 mm<br />
C. Slope of Ramp=Not steeper than 1:6<br />
D. Ratio of Tread & Riser<br />
i) Control bldgs.Riser + tread = 420-45 0 mm<br />
ii) Other bldgs.<br />
2 Riser + Tread = 600-650 mm<br />
Page 10 of 36
3.0 WALLS<br />
Following schedule shall be adhered to for wall material and thickness.<br />
A. External, load bearing walls = Minimum 230 mm thk.<br />
Brick<br />
wall<br />
B. Fire wall (Around Transformers) = Minimum 345 mm thk.<br />
Brick<br />
wall or as per TAC<br />
requirement.<br />
C. Internal partition wall = 230/115 mm thk. Brick<br />
wall/<br />
Glazed partition<br />
Notes:<br />
1. 115 mm thk. Partition walls shall be provided with 230 mm thk. Brick<br />
pillars & reinforcement at regular intervals for stability. Reinforcement<br />
will be provided as per structural <strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
2. Wherever conduits or pipes are required to be concealed within<br />
partition wall, the wall thickness shall be increased suitably.<br />
Page 11 of 36
4.0 DOORS<br />
Doors shall be provided for access, security and safety at all entry & exits of rooms, functional areas<br />
& the buildings. Sizes of the doors shall be determined on the basis of the following schedule.<br />
A. Equipment, Panel area<br />
including packing. - Size of maximum equipment<br />
B. Other areas - Volume of movement through the door.<br />
C. Minimum Ent. door size - 1500 mm x 2100 mm (wall opening<br />
size)<br />
D. W.C., Bath Cubicle Door - 750 mm x 2100 mm (wall opening<br />
size)<br />
E. Minimum size of other doors - 1000 mm x 2100 mm (wall opening<br />
size)<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Normally, entrance doors shall be provided covering full width of<br />
the<br />
Entrance lobby. In that case the door shall be of <strong>com</strong>posite<br />
type consisting of openable shutters & fixed portions.<br />
2. Mechanically operated Rolling shutters shall be provided wherever<br />
area<br />
requirement of openable shutters exceed 2500 mm x 2500 mm.<br />
Page 12 of 36
5.0 WINDOWS/VENTILATORS<br />
Windows/ventilators shall be provided in all areas for natural lighting, ventilation and visibility at<br />
working level.<br />
For the purposes of ventilation, total openable area of the windows/ventilators shall be as per<br />
Factory Act subjected to a minimum of 15% of the floor area to be ventilated. However, for non<br />
process Control Room, security block of Gate Houses and in office areas etc. where visibility from<br />
inside is of prime importance, increased window area shall be provided. Areas ac<strong>com</strong>modating<br />
panels/equipments shall be normally provided with ventilators at high level for unobstructed<br />
distributed lighting.<br />
Windows/ventilators/openings of Control Room shall be provided in accordance with OISD-STD-<br />
163.<br />
Notes:<br />
1. Requirement of window/ventilation area as stipulated above is<br />
for<br />
maximum room/area height of 4000 mm. For height more than<br />
4000 mm additional window/ventilator shall be provided in the<br />
same manner at every work area such as walkway/gangway etc. at<br />
all such working levels. In such cases additional<br />
windows/ventilators shall also be provided to ensure min.<br />
illumination & ventilation at every level of the building/shed.<br />
2. Wherever due to limitation of external wall area or any other<br />
reasons,<br />
stipulated area of window/ventilation cannot be provided, suitable<br />
mechanical/electrical devices shall be provided.<br />
Page 13 of 36
6.0 CANOPY/OVERHANG<br />
Canopy/overhangs shall be provided at all entries & exits for rain & sun protection, accentuation of<br />
the entry/exit and movement from or to parked vehicle as per following schedule.<br />
A. For Control Rooms, canopy shall be provided at all entrances. Canopy<br />
or overhangs shall also be provided for sub stations, warehouses,<br />
storage sheds where regular vehicular movement &<br />
loading/unloading takes place. Size of the canopy shall be decided<br />
based on vehicle parking & covered access to the building/shed,<br />
movement around the vehicle and aesthetics of the building/shed.<br />
B. Overhangs shall be provided over all exits. Size of the overhang shall<br />
be decided based on the aesthetics of the building/shed subject to<br />
minimum of 900 mm.<br />
Waterproofing & drainage provision shall be provided for the canopies & overhangs.<br />
Page 14 of 36
7.0 SHADING DEVICES<br />
Shading devices shall be provided over all windows, openable ventilators for rain & sun protection.<br />
These devices shall be in form of horizontal projections, vertical projected fins or <strong>com</strong>bination of<br />
both as per building facade treatment. Minimum projection shall be 600 mm. The top surface of the<br />
shading devices shall be finished with cement plaster mixed with waterproofing (laid to slope)<br />
<strong>com</strong>pound and shall be provided with GI spouts for drainage.<br />
Page 15 of 36
8.0 PARAPET<br />
Parapets shall be minimum 500 mm high for non-approachable roof and 900 mm high for<br />
approachable roof. Parapet shall be of RCC.<br />
Page 16 of 36
9.0 RAIN WATER PIPES, SPOUTS<br />
Rain water pipes shall be provided for roof water drainage. Number of rain water pipes shall be<br />
decided on the basis of roof Area, slope and rainfall intensity. Rain water pipes shall be embedded<br />
in concrete or brick. RCC or GI spouts may be used for drainage of chajj a/small canopies of ground<br />
floor only.<br />
Page 17 of 36
10.0 ENTRANCE LOBBY<br />
Entrance lobby shall be provided as a <strong>com</strong>mon entrance for all Buildings/sheds ac<strong>com</strong>modating<br />
separate or similar functional spaces integrated together. Individual entries to such functional<br />
spaces shall be from this lobby by means of passages/corridors. Apart from <strong>com</strong>mon entry lobby,<br />
separate independent entries to these functional spaces shall also be provided if functionally<br />
required.<br />
Size of the entrance lobby shall be decided on the basis of volume of the movement subjected to<br />
the minimum requirement of 9 sq.m<br />
Page 18 of 36
11.0 PASSAGES/CORRIDORS<br />
Passages/corridors shall be provided to integrate various spaces. Width of the passages/corridors<br />
shall be as per following schedule.<br />
A. Singly loaded passage/corridor = Minimum 1200 mm.<br />
B. Doubly loaded passage/corridor = Minimum 1800 mm<br />
But whenever passages/corridors are to be used for equipment/machinery/panels etc. the width<br />
shall be determined on the basis of equipment/machinery/panel sizes.<br />
Page 19 of 36
12.0 SERVICE ENTRY<br />
Separate service entry shall be provided for service areas such as Air-condition plant, Electrical<br />
Rooms etc. A <strong>com</strong>mon service entry may be provided depending on spatial arrangement.<br />
Page 20 of 36
13.0 EMERGENCY EXITS<br />
Emergency exits shall be provided for all the building/sheds as per Factory Act & OISD Norms.<br />
Emergency exits for individual function spaces such as console area, cable cellar, switchgear hall<br />
shall also be provided. Emergency exits shall be located in such a manner that escape route is<br />
direct, unobstructed & without passing through any other function areas to safe area.<br />
Corridors/staircases shall be provided as escape route to the emergency exits.<br />
Page 21 of 36
14.0 STAIRCASES<br />
Staircases shall be provided for vertical circulation & emergency exits. Number of staircases shall<br />
be based on building/shed sizes and emergency exit requirements. At least one staircase/ladder<br />
shall be provided for access to the flat roofs for maintenance.<br />
Page 22 of 36
15.0 RAILINGS<br />
Railings shall be provided in stairs, and in all unprotected openings in slabs as a safety device.<br />
Railings in loading/unloading bay of Substations shall be of removable type to facilitate the purpose.<br />
Page 23 of 36
16.0 TOILET<br />
Toilet shall be provided for all buildings/sheds having human occupancy. Toilet shall consist of<br />
Gents Toilet, Ladies Toilet (as per requirement), and separate drinking water enclosure.<br />
Requirement of fittings & fixtures shall be as per National Building Code of India & Factory Act.<br />
Page 24 of 36
17.0 ELECTRICAL ROOM<br />
Electrical Room may be provided to ac<strong>com</strong>modate electrical/telephone main distribution box.<br />
However, depending on size, space requirement, the same may be mounted in wall recess.<br />
Page 25 of 36
18.0 PARTITIONS<br />
Partitions shall be provided between console rooms & rack room in Control Room. Glazed panels<br />
shall be provided for visibility in the partitions as per requirement.<br />
Page 26 of 36
19.0 FALSE CEILING & UNDERDECK INSULATION<br />
False ceilings shall be provided for following purposes wherever required.<br />
A. To reduce room volume and hide ducting etc. for air-conditioned<br />
space.<br />
B. To maintain acoustic level inside any space.<br />
C. To reduce habitable room, corridor, lobby, toilet heights located in<br />
high ceiling building/shed to min. 3000 mm.<br />
Underdeck Insulation will be provided wherever air-conditioning is provided in<br />
single storeyed bldg. whereas in double storeyed bldg., underdeck insulation will be provided under<br />
the roof of air-conditioned areas on first floor only.<br />
Page 27 of 36
20.0 FALSE/CAVITY FLOORING<br />
False/cavity flooring shall be provided to ac<strong>com</strong>modate under floor cabling in Instrumentation<br />
Console, Rack, Tele<strong>com</strong> Room etc.<br />
Page 28 of 36
21.0 PLINTH PROTECTION<br />
All the buildings /sheds shall be provided with minimum 900mm wide plinth protection around the<br />
building /sheds.<br />
Page 29 of 36
PART II - ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES<br />
Page 30 of 36
22.0 GENERAL<br />
All the building elements i.e. floor, wall, ceiling, roof, doors & windows etc. shall be provided with<br />
Architectural finishes as shown in the clauses 2.1 to 2.5.<br />
Note:<br />
1. All the Architectural finishes shall be as per attached Specifications, Standards<br />
& Approved list of vendors.<br />
2. Color Scheme for all Architectural items shall be approved by the Owner<br />
(HPCL)<br />
Page 31 of 36
23.0 FLOOR FINISHES<br />
Sl.<br />
No.<br />
Building Room/Area<br />
Finish<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
Console rooms, Tele<strong>com</strong> room,<br />
Rack room,<br />
Entrance foyer, Office rooms, UPS<br />
room, VSD panel room, corridors<br />
etc.<br />
3. Battery room.<br />
4.<br />
Equipment rooms, AHU, D.G.<br />
room, Pump house, Fire water<br />
pump house, Ware House.<br />
False / Cavity flooring with high pressure<br />
laminate (Antistatic) finished particle<br />
board panels.<br />
Kota stone flooring/ Kota stone flooring<br />
with marble borders & skirting.<br />
Acid Resistant tiles floor finish and dado<br />
(1.5m high)<br />
Heavy-duty cement concrete floor finish<br />
5. Parking Shed, Stores<br />
6. Toilets<br />
Cement concrete granolithic floor finish<br />
or as per other rooms of the building.<br />
Non slip ceramic tile flooring and dado<br />
(2. 1m high)<br />
Skirting shall be provided in all areas. Cement plaster skirting shall be provided in areas having<br />
cement concrete granolithic/ heavy duty cement concrete flooring. For other areas, skirting shall be<br />
of same material as that of flooring.<br />
Panel dividers shall be provided in cement concrete flooring/ cement concrete granolithic/ heavy<br />
duty cement concrete flooring.<br />
Page 32 of 36
24.0 WALL FINISHES (PLASTERING, PAINTING)<br />
Sl.<br />
No.<br />
Surface<br />
ALL BUILDINGS: Internal finish<br />
Finish<br />
1.<br />
2.<br />
3.<br />
Console room, Rack room, Tele<strong>com</strong><br />
rooms, Office rooms, Entrance foyer,<br />
VSD panel room, corridors etc.<br />
Equipment rooms, D.G. room<br />
AHU, service rooms etc., Fire water<br />
pump house, Ware House<br />
Plastic emulsion paint over cement<br />
plaster<br />
Oil bound distemper over cement<br />
plaster.<br />
White/ Color wash over cement plaster.<br />
ALL BUILDINGS: External finish<br />
1. Control Room.<br />
Mangalorian tiles cladding, Decorative<br />
Sandex matt finish over waterproof<br />
cement plaster, finished with final coat<br />
of silicon/acrylic based water repellent<br />
finish. Waterproof cement paint on<br />
soffits.<br />
2.<br />
Sub Station, D.G. room, Fire Water<br />
Pump houses, Ware house etc.<br />
Waterproof cement paint over<br />
waterproof cement plaster/ sand face<br />
plaster<br />
Grooves in plaster shall be provided at the junction of different materials and as<br />
per external facade treatment.<br />
Page 33 of 36
25.0 INTERNAL CEILING FINISHES<br />
Sl.<br />
No.<br />
1.<br />
Surface<br />
All Air-conditioned areas and other<br />
areas where false ceiling is required.<br />
Finish<br />
Aluminium panel False Ceiling<br />
(Luxlon or equivalent)<br />
2. Other areas not indicated above White/ Color wash over cement plaster.<br />
Page 34 of 36
26.0 ROOFING TREATMENT (WATERPROOFING)<br />
Sl.<br />
No.<br />
Surface<br />
1. Rcc. roofs of all buildings<br />
Finish<br />
Ataxic polypropylene modified<br />
reinforced bituminous waterproofing<br />
membrane over cement screed laid to<br />
slope on Rcc. slab.<br />
Page 35 of 36
27.0 DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS<br />
Sl.<br />
No.<br />
Building Room/ Area<br />
Finish<br />
ALL BUILDINGS: Doors<br />
1.<br />
Console room, Rack room, UPS<br />
room, Tele<strong>com</strong> rooms, Entrance/<br />
Exit doors.<br />
2. Office rooms, toilets, stores etc.<br />
3.<br />
Equipment rooms, D.G. room,<br />
AHU, Ware House<br />
Glazed powder coated Aluminium<br />
doors with toughened glass.<br />
Pre-laminated flush doors with wooden<br />
frames.<br />
Pressed steel doors with pressed steel<br />
frames.<br />
ALL BUILDINGS: Windows/Ventilators<br />
1. Control Room, Security Gate House.<br />
2.<br />
Sub Station, D.G. Room and<br />
Ware house.<br />
Glazed powder coated Aluminium<br />
Windows/ventilators with toughened<br />
glass.<br />
Glazed powder coated Steel Windows/<br />
ventilators with plain glass.<br />
Page 36 of 36
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
CIVIL STRUCTURAL DESIGN BASIS<br />
0435-JH0902-CI-BOD-0001<br />
1 Issued for Implementation<br />
ABB VYT KMNP<br />
07-SEP<br />
2009<br />
0 Issued for Implementation<br />
MSS UDB AK<br />
08-MAY<br />
2009<br />
A Issued for Review<br />
SUS UDB AK<br />
05-APR<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
2009<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
Page 1 of 30
INDEX<br />
1. INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................... 4<br />
1.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 4<br />
1.1.1 Applicable Codes and Standards for Design................................................... 4<br />
1.1.2 Applicable codes and standards for materials. ................................................ 6<br />
1.1.3 Standard Drawings......................................................................................... 6<br />
1.1.4 UNIT AND LANGUAGE.............................................................................. 6<br />
1.2 SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................. 6<br />
1.2.1 Location of Site.............................................................................................. 6<br />
1.2.2 Topographical & Geological Conditions ........................................................ 7<br />
2. DESIGN LOADS & DESIGN PHILOSOPHY......................................................................................... 8<br />
2.1 Dead Loads ( DL )................................................................................................. 8<br />
2.2 Live Loads ( LL) ................................................................................................... 8<br />
2.3 Wind Loads (WL).................................................................................................. 9<br />
2.4 Seismic Loads (SL)................................................................................................ 9<br />
2.5 Equipment Loads (EEL) ...................................................................................... 10<br />
2.6 Equipment Operating Loads (EOL) ..................................................................... 10<br />
2.7 Thermal / Friction Load (TL/FL) ......................................................................... 10<br />
2.8 Impact & Vibratory Loads ................................................................................... 10<br />
2.9 Soil and Hydrostatic Pressure (SP)....................................................................... 10<br />
2.10 Other Loads......................................................................................................... 10<br />
3. Foundation Design .................................................................................................................................... 11<br />
3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN.......................................... 11<br />
3.1.1 Depth of foundation ..................................................................................... 11<br />
3.1.2 Stability Criteria:.......................................................................................... 11<br />
3.2 Foundations for Rotating and Reciprocating Equipment ...................................... 12<br />
4. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY FOR PIPE SUPPORTS................................................................................. 14<br />
4.1 TYPE OF LOADS............................................................................................... 14<br />
5. Basic Load Cases & Load Combinations -.............................................................................................. 16<br />
5.1 For Equipment Foundations................................................................................. 17<br />
5.2 For Building Design ............................................................................................ 18<br />
5.3 For Pipe Rack / Sleepers...................................................................................... 19<br />
6. BUILDING ................................................................................................................................................ 21<br />
6.1 Building List........................................................................................................ 21<br />
6.2 Plumbing/Sanitary ............................................................................................... 21<br />
7. STEEL STRUCTURE .............................................................................................................................. 21<br />
7.1 Material ............................................................................................................... 21<br />
7.2 Minimum Thickness of steel elements ................................................................. 21<br />
Page 2 of 30
7.3 Paint Specification............................................................................................... 22<br />
7.4 FIRE PROOFING................................................................................................ 22<br />
7.5 Allowable Deflection........................................................................................... 22<br />
8. Concrete ..................................................................................................................................................... 23<br />
8.1 MATERIALS ...................................................................................................... 23<br />
8.2 Minimum Thickness of Structural Concrete Elements.......................................... 24<br />
8.3 Minimum Height of Pedestals.............................................................................. 24<br />
8.4 Grouting & Minimum Grout Thickness ............................................................... 25<br />
8.5 Allowable Deflection........................................................................................... 25<br />
9. GENERAL CIVIL .................................................................................................................................... 25<br />
9.1 Road and Paving.................................................................................................. 25<br />
9.2 Drainage.............................................................................................................. 27<br />
10. SOFTWARE TO BE USED FOR THE PROJECT .......................................................................... 30<br />
Page 3 of 30
1. INTRODUCTION<br />
This document presents the Civil/Structural Design Basis for the GURU GOBIND SINGH<br />
REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP) to be used for the design of<br />
<strong>civil</strong>, structural and building works.<br />
Design basis describes the minimum basic requirements for reinforced concrete structure,<br />
structural steel & general <strong>civil</strong> work. All items shall be designed for satisfactory performance.<br />
If any conflict arises between this guideline and the applicable standards or codes, this shall<br />
be resolved either by application of the most severe design conditions or resolution by the<br />
Principal Civil/Structural Engineer.<br />
Civil structural Design/Technical <strong>specification</strong> for <strong>civil</strong>, structural and building works are<br />
summarized herein below.<br />
1.1 GENERAL<br />
1.1.1 Applicable Codes and Standards for Design<br />
The following codes and standards shall be applied to <strong>civil</strong>, structural and building design.<br />
Apart from the Indian standard listed in following chapters, all other relevant codes related to<br />
this job requirement shall be followed wherever applicable. The latest edition of codes,<br />
standards etc. shall be used.<br />
(1) Design Loads<br />
Codes / Standards<br />
Dead Loads : IS875 (PART 1)<br />
Imposed Loads : IS875 (PART 2)<br />
Wind Loads : IS875 (PART 3)<br />
Special Loads : IS875 (PART 5)<br />
Seismic Loads : IS:1893 (part-1)<br />
(2) Building<br />
- Layout & Planning : NBC<br />
(3) Steel Construction : IS800<br />
(4) Concrete Construction : IS456<br />
(5) General Civil<br />
- Road : IRC 3,6 , 37<br />
Page 4 of 30
(6) Machine Foundations : IS 2974 (Part-1 to 5)<br />
(7) Liquid retaining structures : IS 3370 (Part-1 to 4)<br />
(8) Fire Protection Facilities for Petroleum<br />
depots, Terminals & Pipeline Installations<br />
: OISD-STD-117<br />
(9) Layout for Oil & Gas Installations : OISD-STD-118<br />
(10) Process Control Room Safety For Blast<br />
Resistance Control Room<br />
: OISD-163<br />
(11) Ductile detailing of RCC Structure : IS13920<br />
(12) Code of practice for use of metal arc<br />
welding for general construction<br />
(13) Code of practice for construction of stone<br />
masonry<br />
(14) Code of practice for structural use of<br />
unreinforced masonry<br />
: IS: 816<br />
: IS: 1597<br />
: IS: 1905<br />
(15) Re<strong>com</strong>mended practice for hot dipped<br />
galvanizing on iron and steel<br />
: IS: 2629<br />
(16) Code of practice for design & construction<br />
of raft foundations<br />
: IS: 2950<br />
(17) Code of practice for earthquake resistant<br />
design and construction of buildings<br />
(18) Re<strong>com</strong>mendations for metal arc welding of<br />
carbon and carbon manganese steel<br />
(19) Code of practice for structural safety of<br />
buildings – Shallow foundations<br />
(20) Code of practice for determination of<br />
bearing capacity of shallow foundations<br />
(21) Code of practice for calculation of<br />
settlements of foundations<br />
: IS:4326<br />
: IS:9595<br />
: IS: 1904<br />
: IS:6403<br />
: IS: 8009(Pt I, II)<br />
Page 5 of 30
1.1.2 Applicable codes and standards for materials.<br />
The following codes and standards shall be applied to the equipment and materials<br />
to be used for the Facility.<br />
(1) Building Materials<br />
Concrete aggregates : IS 6461 PART-I<br />
Materials : IS 6461 PART-II<br />
(2) Structural Steel<br />
Steel Material : IS 2062<br />
(3) Concrete<br />
Re-bar : IS1786 ,IS432 PART(1&2)<br />
Cement : IS269 ,IS455, IS8112, IS12269<br />
AGGREGATES : IS383<br />
(4) Ready Mix Concrete : IS 4926<br />
1.1.3 Standard Drawings<br />
Drawing Number - 0435-JH0902-00-CI-DST-0001-001 TO 017.<br />
1.1.4 UNIT AND LANGUAGE.<br />
(1) Measurement Unit : SI<br />
(2) Language : English<br />
1.2 SITE CONDITIONS<br />
1.2.1 Location of Site<br />
The site is located in Raman Mandi, Bathinda & Bahadurgarh.<br />
Page 6 of 30
1.2.2 Topographical & Geological Conditions<br />
Existing Site Conditions – Generally flat terrain<br />
Elevation<br />
From the Raman Mandi take-off elevation of RL.204.521m above MSL the pipeline runs to<br />
an elevation of 207.729m at Ch. 27 km at Bhatinda.<br />
From the Raman Mandi take-off elevation of RL.203.522m above MSL the pipeline runs to<br />
an elevation of 215.589m at Ch. 234.98 km at Bahadurgarh.<br />
Rainfall Data<br />
Design Groundwater Level<br />
As per geotechnical report, the ground water table encountered at depths varying from 9.05<br />
to 12.01m below existing ground surface. For Ramanmandi and Bhatinda station analysis of<br />
foundations the design ground water table is considered at approximately 4.0m depth below<br />
the existing ground level.<br />
Bhadurgarh water table is at 1.0 m below existing ground level. Depth of Foundation and<br />
Bearing capacity of structures shall confirm to soil investigation report supplied by HPCL.<br />
Page 7 of 30
2. DESIGN LOADS & DESIGN PHILOSOPHY<br />
These loading shall be applicable to all structures irrespective of the material employed for<br />
construction.<br />
2.1 Dead Loads ( DL )<br />
The weight of all permanent construction including self weight of structural members, walls,<br />
fire proofing, floors, roofs, partitions, stairways and fixed service and other equipment empty<br />
weight (excluding their contents).<br />
Following Unit weight shall be adopted:<br />
Reinforced concrete<br />
Plain Concrete<br />
Structural Steel<br />
Backfill soil<br />
= 26 kN/m3<br />
= 25 kN/m3<br />
= 78.5 kN/m3<br />
= 18 kN/m3<br />
2.2 Live Loads ( LL)<br />
Live load in general shall be as per IS: 875, following minimum live loads shall be considered<br />
in the design of structures:<br />
i. Substation/control Room, S.V. Stations &<br />
Service Platform<br />
Panel floor / battery room<br />
AHU, UPS, Locker Room<br />
Blower Room<br />
Stairs for substations<br />
Warehouse Floor / Grade Slab / Ground floor<br />
Access / Service Platform<br />
iii. Roofs<br />
Non Accessible RC Roof<br />
Accessible RC Roof<br />
Sheeted Roof<br />
v. Staircase<br />
Plant / Non plant buildings<br />
Stores<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
10.0 kN/m 2<br />
5.0 kN/m 2<br />
7.5 kN/m 2<br />
5.0 kN/m 2<br />
10.0 kN/m 2<br />
2.5 kN/m 2 or 3kN Point<br />
Load at center<br />
1.5 kN/m2<br />
2.5 kN/m2<br />
0.75 kN/m2<br />
5.0 kN/m 2<br />
7.5 kN/m 2 or as per actual<br />
Page 8 of 30
2.3 Wind Loads (WL)<br />
Basic wind Speed (V b )<br />
Risk Coefficient (k1)<br />
Terrain Category for (k2) = 1<br />
Structure Class for (k2)<br />
Terrain, Height and Structure Size<br />
Factor (k2)<br />
= 47 m/s<br />
= 1.00 for all General Category Structures<br />
= B<br />
Topography Factor (k3) = 1.00<br />
Design Wind Speed (V Z )<br />
= As given below in the table<br />
= V b *k1*k2*k3 m/s<br />
Design Wind Pressure (p Z ) = 0.6*V Z<br />
2<br />
N/m 2<br />
Wind Load – 10 % Extra Equipment area should be considered for connected piping to<br />
equipment as per IS 875 –part-III<br />
Wind pressure on Buildings / Structures<br />
Height<br />
(m)<br />
K2<br />
V Z<br />
m/s<br />
p z<br />
N/m 2<br />
p z<br />
KN/m 2<br />
Up to 10m 1.03 56.65 1925 1.93<br />
10m - 15m 1.07 58.85 2078 2.08<br />
15m - 20m 1.10 60.50 2196 2.20<br />
20m - 30m 1.13 62.15 2319 2.32<br />
30m - 50m 1.18 64.90 2527 2.53<br />
50m - 100m 1.24 68.20 2791 2.79<br />
2.4 Seismic Loads (SL)<br />
a. Seismic Design shall be done in accordance with IS 1893 (part1 ) - 2002<br />
b. Seismic Zone : Zone – IV<br />
c. Zone Factor : 0.24<br />
d. Importance Factor : 1.50 (For substation, control room and other<br />
essential facilities)<br />
1.25 (For Non-Plant Buildings such as guard<br />
room/admin building)<br />
e. Soil Type : Type-II (Medium Soil)<br />
Note: Static seismic analysis shall be performed for structures analysis.<br />
Page 9 of 30
2.5 Equipment Loads (EEL)<br />
Equipment loads for various conditions such as EEL - Empty Condition, EOL - Operating<br />
Condition and ETL - Test Condition are considered.<br />
For calculating empty weight of the equipment all fixtures, platforms, ladders and attached<br />
piping but excluding contents shall be considered. When piping weight is not indicated<br />
separately or included in the weight of the equipment the same shall be taken as 10% of the<br />
empty weight of the equipment.<br />
2.6 Equipment Operating Loads (EOL)<br />
Operating loads shall <strong>com</strong>prise of the maximum design loads sustained by the equipment<br />
during plant operation including inventory of product<br />
2.7 Thermal / Friction Load (TL/FL)<br />
Horizontal forces due to thermal expansion of horizontal vessels/ Exchangers shall be<br />
relieved by using slotted holes and slide plates and remaining force derived from product of<br />
the sliding saddle gravity load and co-efficient of friction (0.3 to steel or 0.08 PTFE), which<br />
shall be applied to each support.<br />
2.8 Impact & Vibratory Loads<br />
Impact load shall be defined as an equivalent static force caused by a moving object.<br />
Structures subjected to impact or vibratory loads shall be designed as per the provisions of<br />
IS 875 & IS: 2974.Requirements for monorail shall be as per IS-800, IS-875 or<br />
manufacturer’s data whichever is more stringent.<br />
2.9 Soil and Hydrostatic Pressure (SP)<br />
Pressure on basement walls - In the design of basement walls or similar (approximately<br />
vertical) structures below grade, provision shall be made for resisting lateral pressure of the<br />
adjacent soil. If a portion or whole of the adjacent soil is below free water surface, pressure<br />
<strong>com</strong>putations shall be based on the diminished weight of the soil (due to buoyancy) plus full<br />
hydrostatic pressure.<br />
If difference in plot level and surrounding area is more than lm then <strong>com</strong>plete RCC wall shall<br />
be designed to withstand earth pressure as well as surcharge.<br />
Uplift on Floors - In the design of basement floors and similar (approximately horizontal)<br />
constructions below grade, the upward pressure of water shall be taken as full hydrostatic<br />
pressure applied over the entire plan area. Factors of safety against uplift shall be 1.2.<br />
2.10 Other Loads<br />
Apart from the specified live loads, any other equipment load or possible overloading during<br />
construction/ hydro-test/maintenance/erection shall also be considered in the design. Under<br />
hydro test condition the wind force shall be taken as 25% of normal loading.<br />
Page 10 of 30
All buildings/ Structures shall be designed to resist the worst <strong>com</strong>bination of the<br />
above loads.<br />
3. Foundation Design<br />
Depth of foundation, Safe bearing pressure (Allowable net bearing capacity) & other design<br />
parameters for design shall be based on the following criteria & shall confirm to Soil<br />
Investigation report supplied by HPCL for respective area -<br />
Maximum settlement<br />
S N.<br />
Foundation<br />
Settlement (mm)<br />
1. Foundation for all types of equipments Pipe racks, Plant bldgs.etc 25<br />
2 Footings for non-plant bldgs.including raft fdns. 40<br />
3 Foundations for oil storage tanks ( Edge Settlement) 150<br />
Allowable loss of contact should not exceed 10% for DL+LL and should be less than 20%<br />
subjected to wind and seismic load.<br />
3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN<br />
3.1.1 Depth of foundation<br />
The type & depth of foundation shall be as per geotechnical report supplied by HPCL.<br />
Following are minimum depths of foundations:<br />
Tank Foundation – 800 mm<br />
Building foundations - 1500 mm<br />
Equipment foundations - 300 mm<br />
Pipe sleepers - 300 mm<br />
3.1.2 Stability Criteria:<br />
Factor of safety against overturning (For Dead load) – 2.0<br />
Factor of Safety against overturning (For Wind& seismic loading condition) – 1.5<br />
Factor of safety for sliding – For plant operating with or without live load shall be 1.75 & with<br />
wind/earthquake shall be 1.5.<br />
Factor of safety for Buoyancy – The sum of vertically downward loads shall exceed 1.2xsum<br />
of all vertically upward loads.<br />
Subsoil water effect in foundation design: The water table above depth of footing results in<br />
reduction in soil bearing pressure & shall be incorporated in foundation design.<br />
Page 11 of 30
Design philosophy for Equipment Foundations –<br />
Foundation design shall be as per Geo-Technical report / data. Loads acting on Equipment<br />
foundation are described in Chapter 2.0.<br />
Equipment foundation pedestal should be 300mm above FGL/Paving.<br />
3.2 Foundations for Rotating and Reciprocating Equipment<br />
Unless otherwise specified foundation design shall follow general criteria<br />
indicated below:<br />
Design of foundation shall confirm to IS 2974 (Part-1 TO 5)<br />
Considerable rigidity of the machine foundation is essential to avoid failure of the machine<br />
bearings. The foundation must have sufficient mass to absorb the vibration. The natural<br />
frequency of the foundation should be less than 0.8 or greater than 1.2 times the operating<br />
frequency of the machine to avoid resonance.<br />
Where structural steel associated with walkways and platforms is to be erected around the<br />
machine foundation, the attachment of the steelwork to the foundation for support should be<br />
avoided. If the steel is attached to the foundation the effect of this additional mass on the<br />
foundation response to vibration shall be included in the design.<br />
• Reinforcement should be provided on all faces of the concrete to give a minimum<br />
reinforcement value of 50 kg/m 3 for up stands and 30 kg/m 3 for foundation rafts.<br />
• The foundation thickness for vibrating machines should be at least 600 mm, unless a<br />
smaller thickness is given by the machine manufacturer.<br />
• Proportion the base to ensure that the eccentricity between the centroid of the static<br />
loads and the centroid of the foundation base and the eccentricity between the centroid<br />
of the vertical dynamic loads and the centroid of the foundation base are both within 5%<br />
of the relevant base dimension.<br />
• The machine foundation should be isolated from any adjacent foundations and<br />
structures, if possible.<br />
Page 12 of 30
Pump Foundation shall be block type foundation, depth of foundation shall be 700mm<br />
and bearing capacity should not exceed 5T/m2. Soil at the foundation base is well<br />
<strong>com</strong>pacted having density equivalent to 90% of maximum dry density.<br />
CRITERIA<br />
APPLICATION<br />
*Allowable amplitude,<br />
Rotating : P ≥ 400 KW<br />
Natural frequency of foundation<br />
Dynamic<br />
Reciprocating : P ≥ 100 KW<br />
analysis Natural frequency of foundation Rotating : P ≥ 100 KW<br />
Foundation<br />
weight<br />
control<br />
Reciprocating : P ≥ 40 KW<br />
More than 3 x equip. weight Rotating : P < 100 KW<br />
More than 5 x equip. weight Reciprocating : P < 40 KW<br />
P = Rated Power output of equipment (unit KW).<br />
*If the supplier’s requirement is available, same shall be considered.<br />
Page 13 of 30
4. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY FOR PIPE SUPPORTS<br />
Pipe supports shall be entirely in Reinforced Concrete for piping above ground, structural<br />
supports for manifold piping & supports inside sheds.<br />
4.1 TYPE OF LOADS<br />
Dead Loads : DL<br />
This shall mean, the weights of pipes, fittings, valves, insulation and the fluid contents of<br />
piping, including the weight of Cable ducts wherever installed. Piping empty load (Ple)<br />
includes weight of piping and insulation.<br />
Piping Loads shall be calculated considering the pipe diameters and piping arrangement<br />
subject to minimum of 1.25 kN/m2 over entire span.<br />
Friction Force (Longitudinal & Transverse): FL<br />
Longitudinal friction force equal to 5% of the total pipe weight tributary to that pipe support<br />
( beam) of carrying more that 3 lines , 10% for carrying 2-3 lines & 20% for carrying one<br />
line.<br />
Wind Loads: WL<br />
Transverse wind load shall be calculated depending on the width of pipe rack as per<br />
following table. This forces shall be considered irrespective of the height between two tiers.<br />
Width of pipe Rack<br />
Up to 4m<br />
Above 4m but up to 6m<br />
Above 6m but up to 10m<br />
Wind force at each tier level (N)<br />
1.25 x p x s<br />
1.50 x p x s<br />
2.00 x p x s<br />
Where p = Horizontal wind pressure as per IS-875 (Part 3) (in N/m2)<br />
S = Spacing of portal (in m)<br />
Piping Load (Operating – Plo)<br />
Piping operating load includes piping self weight, insulation and material weight carried by<br />
pipe.<br />
Piping load (Testing – PLt)<br />
Piping test load consists of self weight, insulation and test material weight.<br />
Piping Anchor Load (AL)<br />
Piping Anchor load shall be supplied from Piping division from stress analysis.<br />
Page 14 of 30
Loading on Longitudinal Beams<br />
Longitudinal beams connecting portal columns shall be sufficiently strong to sustain a<br />
minimum of 25% of the load on the transverse beams or 10kN at center which ever is<br />
maximum. This total load shall be assumed as two equal concentrated loads acting at 1/3rd<br />
span. This load shall be in addition to the piping loads transferred from the intermediate<br />
beams. Other longitudinal axial forces <strong>com</strong>ing on it from the design of the supporting system<br />
shall also be simultaneously taken into account in the design of the longitudinal beam. Loads<br />
from monorails, when supported from these beams, shall also be considered to be acting<br />
simultaneously along with all other loads mentioned above.<br />
Page 15 of 30
5. Basic Load Cases & Load Combinations -<br />
DL -<br />
LL -<br />
FPL -<br />
WL -<br />
SL -<br />
EEL -<br />
EOL -<br />
ETL -<br />
HOL -<br />
SP -<br />
ELL -<br />
BPL -<br />
FL -<br />
AL -<br />
TL -<br />
PLe -<br />
PLo -<br />
PLt -<br />
Dead Load<br />
Live load<br />
Fire-proofing load<br />
Wind load<br />
Seismic load<br />
Equipment Empty Load<br />
Equipment Operating Load<br />
Equipment Test Load<br />
Horizontal operating load<br />
Soil Pressure<br />
Erection load (Temporary Loading)<br />
Bundle Pull Load<br />
Friction Load<br />
Anchor Load<br />
Thermal Load<br />
Piping Dead Load<br />
Piping Operating Load<br />
Piping Test Load<br />
Page 16 of 30
5.1 For Equipment Foundations<br />
Load Combinations DL LL WL SL EEL<br />
EOL<br />
&<br />
HOL<br />
ETL FL ELL REMARKS<br />
Equipment foundation design ( For Pressure calculation)<br />
DL + EEL + WL 1.0 1.0 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 Erection / Empty Condition<br />
DL +EOL +WL 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 -<br />
DL+EOL + SL 1.0 - - 1.0 - 1.0 - - -<br />
DL+EOL+FL+WL 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 - 1.0 - Operating Condition<br />
DL+EOL+FL+SL 1.0 - - 1.0 - 1.0 - 1.0 -<br />
DL+EOL+FL 1.0 - - - - 1.0 - 1.0 -<br />
DL+LL+ETL+WL 1.0 1.0 0.25* - - - 1.0 - - Test Condition<br />
Equipment foundation design ( For Concrete design)<br />
DL + EEL + WL 1.5 1.5 1.5 - 1.5 - - 1.5 Erection / Empty Condition<br />
DL +EOL +WL 1.2 - 1.2 - - 1.2 - - -<br />
DL+EOL + SL 1.2 - - 1.2 - 1.2 - - -<br />
DL+EOL+FL+WL 1.2 - 1.2 - - 1.2 - 1.2 -<br />
DL+EOL+FL+SL 1.2 - - 1.2 - 1.2 - 1.2 -<br />
DL+EOL+FL 1.5 - - - - 1.5 - 1.5 -<br />
Operating Condition<br />
DL+LL+ETL+WL 1.5 1.5 0.375* - - - 1.5 - - Test Condition<br />
* For Test Condition 25% of Wind Load is considered.<br />
Page 17 of 30
5.2 For Building Design<br />
Load Combinations DL LL WL SL EEL EOL& HOL ETL REMARKS<br />
For Concrete Member Design<br />
DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - - - - -<br />
DL + WL 1.5 - 1.5 - - - -<br />
DL+LL+WL 1.2 1.2 1.2 - - - -<br />
DL + LL + SL 1.2 1.2* - 1.2 - - -<br />
DL + SL 0.9 - - 1.5 - - -<br />
For Foundation Design<br />
DL + LL 1.0 1.0 - - - - -<br />
DL + WL 1.0 - 1.0 - - - -<br />
DL+LL+WL 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - -<br />
DL + LL + SL 1.0 1.0* - 1.0 - - -<br />
DL + SL 0.9 - - 1.0 - - -<br />
For Steel Structure<br />
DL + LL 1.0 1.0 - - - - -<br />
DL + WL 1.0 - 1.0 - - - -<br />
DL+LL+WL 0.8 0.8 0.8 - - - -<br />
DL + LL + SL 0.8 0.8 * - 0.8 - - -<br />
DL + SL 1.0 - - 1.0 - - -<br />
* 50 %. of Live Load on structure.<br />
Page 18 of 30
5.3 For Pipe Rack / Sleepers<br />
Load Combinations DL LL WL SL EEL<br />
EOL<br />
&<br />
HOL<br />
ETL BPL FL ELL PLe PLo PLt TL AL<br />
REMARKS<br />
For Pipe Racks / sleepers ( For Pressure calculation)<br />
DL+ LL+PLo+FL+AL+EOL 1.0 1.0 - - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 Normal<br />
DL+LL+PLo+FL+AL+SL+EOL 1.0 1.0 - 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0<br />
DL+PLe+FL+AL+SL+EEL 1.0 - - 1.0 1.0 - - - 1.0 - 1.0 - - - 1.0<br />
DL+LL+PLo+EOL+AL+FL+WL 1.0 1.0 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0<br />
DL+PLe+EEL+AL+FL+WL 1.0 - 1.0 - 1.0 - - - 1.0 - 1.0 - - - 1.0<br />
DL+PLt+ETL 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - -<br />
DL+PLt+ETL+0.5WL 1.0 - 1.0* - - - 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - -<br />
DL+WL+PLe+EEL 1.0 - 1.0 - 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - - - -<br />
DL+SL+PLe+EEL 1.0 - - 1.0 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - - - -<br />
Seismic<br />
Wind<br />
`<br />
Test<br />
Empty<br />
For Pipe Racks / sleepers ( For Concrete design)<br />
DL+ LL+PLo+FL+AL+EOL 1.5 1.5 - - - 1.5 - - 1.5 - 1.5 - - 1.5 Normal<br />
DL+LL+PLo+FL+AL+SL+EOL 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 - 1.2 - - 1.2 - - 1.2 - - 1.2<br />
Seismic<br />
DL+PLo+FL+AL+SL+EOL 1.5 - - 1.5 - 1.5 - - 1.5 - - 1.5 - - 1.5<br />
Page 19 of 30
DL+LL+PLo+EOL+AL+FL+WL 1.2 1.2 1.2 - - 1.2 - - 1.2 - - 1.2 - - 1.2<br />
DL+PLo+EOL+AL+FL+WL 1.5 - 1.5 - - 1.5 - - 1.5 - - 1.5 - 1.5<br />
DL+PLt+ETL 1.5 - - - - - 1.5 - - - - - 1.5 - .<br />
DL+PLt+ETL+0.5WL 1.5 - 1.5* - - - 1.5 - - - - - 1.5 -<br />
DL+WL+PLe+EEL 1.5 - 1.5 - 1.5 - - - - - 1.5 - - -<br />
DL+SL+PLe+EEL 1.5 - - 1.5 1.5 - - - - - 1.5 - - -<br />
Wind<br />
Test<br />
Empty<br />
Load Combinations DL LL WL SL EEL EOL<br />
&<br />
HOL<br />
ETL BPL FL ELL PLe PLo PLt TL AL REMARKS<br />
For Pipe Racks / sleepers ( For Steel Structure Design)<br />
DL+ LL+PLo+FL+AL+EOL 1.0 1.0 - - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 Normal<br />
DL+LL+PLo+FL+AL+SL+EOL 0.8 0.8 - 0.8 - 0.8 - - 0.8 - - 0.8 - - 0.8<br />
DL+PLo+FL+AL+SL+EOL 1.0 - - 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0<br />
DL+LL+PLo+EOL+AL+FL+WL 0.8 0.8 0.8 - - 0.8 - - 0.8 - - 0.8 - - 0.8<br />
DL+PLo+EOL+AL+FL+WL 1.0 - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 - - 1.0 1.0<br />
DL+PLe+ETL 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - .<br />
DL+PLe+ETL+0.5WL 1.0 1.0 1.0* - - - 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 -<br />
DL+WL+PLe+EEL 1.0 - 1.0 - 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - -<br />
DL+SL+PLe+EEL 1.0 - - 1.0 1.0 - - - - - 1.0 - - -<br />
Seismic<br />
Wind<br />
Test<br />
Empty<br />
Page 20 of 30
6. BUILDING<br />
6.1 Building List<br />
1 Substation<br />
2 Warehouse<br />
3 P/L Control room<br />
4 D.G. room<br />
5 SV Stations<br />
6.2 Plumbing/Sanitary<br />
Material for plumbing and sanitary shall be best quality with ISI mark. Separate water<br />
tanks shall be provided for each building. List of make shall be provided in the tender<br />
to avoid dispute in prices. This shall be gravity piped system for flows originating from<br />
toilet blocks, showers etc. The discharge shall be collected in septic tank and<br />
subsequently in soak pit.<br />
7. STEEL STRUCTURE<br />
7.1 Material<br />
(1) Material Standard & Grade<br />
Unless otherwise noted, material code / standard & grade as below shall be<br />
applied:<br />
Plate & Shape : IS: 2062 (Grade A)<br />
Steel Pipe<br />
: Medium duty (IS1239 (Part1)<br />
Ordinary Black Bolt : Class 4.6 (IS 1367)<br />
High Strength Bolt : Class 8.8 (IS1367, IS3757, IS4000<br />
Checkered Plate : IS: 3502<br />
Steel Grating : IS: 2062(Grade A)<br />
Anchor Bolt – Material for Anchor bolt (MS Bars, washer, nuts and plates etc.) shall<br />
be as per relevant Indian standard.<br />
Hexagonal bolts and nuts – IS3138<br />
IS 277-1992 : Galvanized steel sheets (Plain and corrugated).<br />
7.2 Minimum Thickness of steel elements<br />
The minimum thickness of various structural <strong>com</strong>ponents (Hot rolled sections) shall<br />
be as given:<br />
General Construction:<br />
Trusses, purlins, side girths & bracings<br />
Columns, beams<br />
6mm<br />
7mm<br />
Page 21 of 30
Gussets in trusses & girders<br />
i) Up to and including 12m span 8mm<br />
ii) Above 12m span<br />
Stiffeners<br />
Base plates<br />
Chequered plate<br />
Grating<br />
10mm<br />
8mm<br />
12mm<br />
6mm (on plain)<br />
Hot Dip galvanized MS grating<br />
The minimum thickness of tubes shall be as specified in IS: 806.<br />
Staircase: Staircase shall be as pre Standard drawings.<br />
Width – 900mm<br />
Tread - 250 mm<br />
Rise - 185-200 mm<br />
7.3 Paint Specification.<br />
Painting shall be provided as per Job Specifications and Architectural layout.<br />
7.4 FIRE PROOFING<br />
a) Where required by OISD-STD-164 norms, structural steel members shall be<br />
fireproofed by concrete encasing or guniting (minimum thickness = 50mm).<br />
b) For column elements steel sections wherever required up to and including<br />
500mm depth shall be coated by solid fill while section more than 500mm depth shall<br />
be coated in the shape of the profile.<br />
c) For Beam elements steel sections up to and including 300mm depth<br />
shall be coated by solid fill while section more than 300mm depth shall be coated in<br />
the shape of the profile.<br />
7.5 Allowable Deflection<br />
Allowable deflection for steel structure is specified as follows:<br />
For Pipe Supporting Beam : L/300 , Max. 25 mm<br />
For Eq’t Supporting Beam : L/500 , Max. 25 mm<br />
For Crane Girder<br />
: L/600 , Max. 25 mm<br />
For Other beams : L/325<br />
Purlins / Cladding runner : L/200<br />
Grating/ Chequered. Plate : L/200 or 6mm whichever is smaller.<br />
Where L = Span length of the Supporting beam<br />
Column (under normal loads) : (1/325)*H<br />
H= Height of each story<br />
Page 22 of 30
Column (wind/ seismic loads) : (1/250)*H H= Height of each story<br />
8. Concrete<br />
Concrete construction shall be conforming to IS: 456 -2000 shall be used<br />
8.1 MATERIALS<br />
a) Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC)<br />
M30 grade concrete or higher shall be used for all RCC structures, pits,<br />
foundations except grade slab & paving based on exposure condition and<br />
serviceability.<br />
Paving: M25<br />
Grade slab: M20<br />
b) Lean Concrete<br />
Lean concrete conforming to IS: 456 shall be used. The grade of concrete<br />
shall be as per Table below. It shall confirm to standard/detailed drawings.<br />
i. Under All RCC foundations<br />
except base of liquid retaining<br />
structures<br />
ii Under base of liquid<br />
retaining structures<br />
iii. Encasement Concrete<br />
iv. Filling concrete<br />
( To be used as filler material<br />
wherever loose sub grade<br />
exists by removing loose soil<br />
or where levels are to be<br />
made up to desired founding<br />
level)<br />
100mm thick PCC 1:4:8 with 100mm projection from<br />
face of foundation<br />
100mm thick PCC 1:3:6 with 100mm projection from<br />
face of foundation<br />
M15 grade concrete with 10mm down aggregates<br />
M5 (Nominal Mix)<br />
c) Plain Cement Concrete (PCC), plinth protection shall be as per job<br />
<strong>specification</strong> and job detailed/standard drawings.<br />
d) Cement<br />
For Substructure : Ordinary Portland Cement confirming to IS-8112<br />
(Gr43), Portland Pozzolana Cement confirming to IS-1489 ,Slag Cement<br />
whichever available in market<br />
For Superstructure: Ordinary Portland Cement confirming to IS-8112 (Gr 43),<br />
Portland Pozzolana Cement confirming to IS-1489, Slag Cement whichever<br />
available in market<br />
Page 23 of 30
e) Rebar<br />
For Substructure<br />
For Superstructure<br />
: Fe415 confirming to IS:1786<br />
: Fe415 confirming to IS:1786<br />
Provision should be kept for Fe 500 , based on market availability.<br />
8.2 Minimum Thickness of Structural Concrete Elements<br />
The following minimum thickness shall be followed:<br />
- Footings (All types including raft foundations without beams) 300mm<br />
(Note: Tapered footings shall not have thickness less than 150mm at the edges.<br />
Minimum average thickness shall not be less than 300mm)<br />
- Basement Walls & Base Slab 150mm<br />
- Slab thickness in Raft foundations with beam<br />
& slab construction<br />
350mm<br />
- Floor/Roof Slab, Walkway, Canopy Slab resting on beams 125mm<br />
- Cable/Pipe Trench/Launder Walls & Base Slab 100mm<br />
- Parapet/Cantilevered Canopy Slab 100mm<br />
- Louver/Fin. 100mm<br />
- Pre-cast Trench Cover/Floor Slab 100mm<br />
- Pre-cast Floor Slab/Louver (in contact with liquid) 100mm<br />
- Liquid Retaining/Leak proof Structure Walls & Base Slab 150mm<br />
- Underground Pit/Reservoir (Below ground water table)<br />
Walls & Base slab<br />
- Underground Pit (Above ground water table)<br />
Walls & Base Slab<br />
250mm<br />
200mm<br />
8.3 Minimum Height of Pedestals<br />
The minimum projection of pedestals supporting any steel structure/stanchion<br />
bases shall be 300/150mm above the high point of pavement/ finished<br />
grade/finished floor level whichever is higher, for outdoor and indoor located<br />
pedestals respectively. The minimum projection of pedestals for staircase/ladder<br />
shall be 150mm.<br />
Page 24 of 30
8.4 Grouting & Minimum Grout Thickness<br />
The minimum thickness of grout shall be 25 mm. All anchor bolt sleeves/pockets<br />
and spaces under column bases, shoe plates etc. shall be grouted with free flow,<br />
non-shrink (premix type) grout with 28-day minimum cube crushing strength of<br />
40N/mm 2 .<br />
Ordinary cement sand (1:2) grout shall only be used under the base plates of<br />
crossover, short pipe supports (not exceeding 1.5 m height) and small operating<br />
platforms (not exceeding 2.0m in height) not supporting any equipment<br />
8.5 Allowable Deflection<br />
Allowable deflection for Concrete Structure is specified as follows:<br />
For Pipe Supporting Beam : L/300 , Max. 25 mm<br />
For Eq’t Supporting Beam : L/500 , Max. 25 mm<br />
For Other beams : L/325<br />
Where L = Span length of the Supporting beam<br />
Column : (1/200)*H H= Height of each story<br />
9. GENERAL CIVIL<br />
9.1 Road and Paving<br />
Road design shall be as per IRC loading and <strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
Main Road : 7.5 m wide bituminous road consisting of 6.0m carriageway & 0.75m<br />
wide shoulders on either sides.<br />
Access road : 6.0m wide bituminous road consisting of 4.5m wide carriageway &<br />
0.75m wide shoulders on either side.<br />
Foot path: 1.0m wide of PCC.<br />
Road width shall be as per approved plot plan drawings.<br />
In principle, classification of paving is assumed as below:<br />
Inside Plant Area (maintenance area) : Heavy Duty Concrete paving<br />
Inside Plant Area (other than maintenance area): Light Duty Concrete paving<br />
Setback Area : Bare<br />
Around Building : Plinth protection in PCC<br />
Inside Dike : Bare<br />
Open/Future Area : Bare<br />
Paving requirement shall be as marked in plot plan / layout drawings.<br />
Basic <strong>specification</strong> for road and paving used for estimation are as follows:<br />
Page 25 of 30
(1) Specification of Road<br />
CLASS<br />
LAYER<br />
WIDTH<br />
(m)<br />
MATERIAL<br />
THICKNE<br />
SS<br />
(mm)<br />
MAIN<br />
APPROACH<br />
ROAD<br />
MAIN<br />
INTERNAL<br />
ROAD<br />
OTHER<br />
ROADS<br />
Surface<br />
As per<br />
layout<br />
Shoulder 2 x 0.75<br />
Base course<br />
Sub-base<br />
Sub-grade<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
Surface 6.0<br />
Shoulder 2 x 0.75<br />
Base course<br />
Sub-base<br />
Sub-grade<br />
Surface<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
layout<br />
Shoulder 2 x 0.75<br />
Base course<br />
Sub-base<br />
Sub-grade<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
As per<br />
IRC<br />
Premix bituminous carpet<br />
with seal coat<br />
75mm thick WBM in<br />
Grade II aggregates<br />
WBM in Grade II<br />
aggregates (2 layers of<br />
75mm thk.)<br />
WBM in Grade I<br />
aggregates (2 layers of<br />
100mm thk.)<br />
50<br />
75<br />
150<br />
200<br />
Compacted sub-grade -<br />
Premix bituminous carpet<br />
with seal coat<br />
75mm thick WBM in<br />
Grade II aggregates<br />
WBM in Grade II<br />
aggregates (2 layers of<br />
75mm thk.)<br />
WBM in Grade I<br />
aggregates (2 layers of<br />
100mm thk.)<br />
65<br />
75<br />
150<br />
200<br />
Compacted sub-grade -<br />
Premix bituminous carpet<br />
with seal coat<br />
75mm thick WBM in<br />
Grade II aggregates<br />
WBM in Grade II<br />
aggregates (2 layers of<br />
75mm thk.)<br />
WBM in Grade I<br />
aggregates (2 layers of<br />
100mm thk.)<br />
65<br />
75<br />
150<br />
200<br />
Compacted sub-grade -<br />
Page 26 of 30
(2) Specification of Paving<br />
Class. Layer Material Thickness(mm)<br />
Heavy Duty Surface Conc. 200<br />
Base-course WBM(2 Layer) 150<br />
Light Duty Surface Conc. 150<br />
Base-course Compacted Sand 150<br />
Light Duty Surface Conc. 150<br />
(Pump Base-course Compacted Sand 150<br />
Area)<br />
Paver Block (For parking and driveway)<br />
Surface Concrete Paver Blocks 80-100<br />
Sand cushion 50<br />
Base-course WBM(2 Layer) 150<br />
Gravel Paving Surface Gravel 100<br />
Paving design shall be carried out on rational basis related to predicted wheel load<br />
application.<br />
Isolation joint & Construction joints shall be provided as specified in job <strong>specification</strong> and<br />
confirming to IRC guidelines.<br />
Expansion joint shall be provided at interval of 15 m. Details shall be similar to standard<br />
drawings , slope of paving shall be 1/100UNO. Raised concrete kerb shall be provided<br />
whenever necessary to contain spillage.<br />
Provision should be kept for WMM based on availability of material. Refer Job standard<br />
drawings for other details , paving shall confirm to applicable BIS standards.<br />
Road Bridges / Culverts<br />
Storm water drains shall cross the road by suitable pipe culverts or box culverts as the case<br />
may be. Material of construction of culverts shall be as below :<br />
Pipe culverts : Precast R.C.C. hume pipe of Class NP3/NP4 (Min. size dia.350 mm) , shall<br />
confirm to IS458.<br />
Box culverts: R.C.C. construction (M30 concrete grade)<br />
9.2 Drainage<br />
Drainage shall be designed for average rainfall intensity of 25 year frequency , 5 minute<br />
duration storm for the site geographical area. Drainage design shall be carried out on<br />
rational basis in accordance with industry practice.<br />
Page 27 of 30
Rainfall Intensity –<br />
Storm Water Drain<br />
a) Type : Rectangular/trapezoidal type open drains<br />
b) Construction: RCC type along roadsides, Brick masonry type in tank form area.<br />
Sanitary Sewer<br />
Sanitary Drain Pipe - Stoneware Glazed pipe<br />
Domestic drainage from buildings is directed to septic tanks. By gravity system<br />
Sanitray drainge system shall include septic tank, distribution box and an<br />
underground drain field. The design of system shall confirm to relevant Indian<br />
standards and system should adhere to local / state authorities regulation.<br />
Oily Water Sewer System<br />
Contaminated mixture from surface drain , scraper barrel pit, etc. shall be directed<br />
to adjacent oily water disposal system. Transformer <strong>com</strong>pound shall have a waste<br />
collection pit. Transformer waste oil will be removed from site by tanker.<br />
Design criteria and short <strong>specification</strong> for drainage system are as follows:<br />
(1) Design Flow Rate<br />
(a) Rainfall: 1250mm (maximum recorded rainfall)<br />
(b) Fire Water : As per OISD-116 guidelines.<br />
(2) Discharge Quantity Of Storm Water<br />
The following equation shall be used to calculate design quantities of storm<br />
water.<br />
⎛ 1 ⎞<br />
Qr = ⎜ × C × I × A<br />
6 ⎟<br />
⎝ 3.6 × 10 ⎠<br />
Where,<br />
Qr<br />
: Design quantities of storm water (m 3 /sec)<br />
C : Run-off coefficient (refer to Table -1)<br />
I<br />
: Design rainfall intensity (mm/hr)<br />
A : Catchment area (m 2 )<br />
Page 28 of 30
TABLE -1 RUN-OFF COEFFICIENT<br />
Surface Condition<br />
Run-Off Coefficient<br />
Roof 0.90<br />
Concrete Road, Paving 0.90<br />
Asphalt Road, Paving 0.90<br />
Gravel Road, Paving 0.50<br />
Soil, Green belt 0.2<br />
(3) Hydraulic Design<br />
Flow Velocity and Quantity<br />
The velocity and quantity of hydraulic flow in open drains or underground pipes<br />
shall be calculated by using the Manning formula as below :<br />
1<br />
n<br />
R<br />
2 3<br />
V = × ×<br />
Q = A×<br />
V<br />
Where,<br />
I<br />
V : Velocity (m/sec)<br />
n : Coefficient of Roughness (refer to Table - 2)<br />
R : Hydraulic Radius (m)<br />
I : Slope of channel<br />
Q : Discharge Quantity (m 3 /sec)<br />
A : Hydraulic section (m 2 )<br />
1<br />
2<br />
The flow velocity shall not be less than 0.6 m/sec in general at the design<br />
flow rate except excavated earth channel without lining.<br />
The flow velocity shall not be more than 2.5 m/sec at the design flow rate.<br />
Coefficient of roughness is shown in Table -2.<br />
Closed conduits<br />
Table -2 Typical coefficient of roughness<br />
Open Drains<br />
Steel pipe : 0.013 Concrete lined : 0.017<br />
Cast iron pipe : 0.013 Stone riprap : 0.025<br />
Concrete pipe : 0.014<br />
Excavated earth : 0.028 (Straight)<br />
Plastic pipe : 0.009 Excavated rock : 0.040 (rough)<br />
Storm water drainage shall be designed as flowing full and sanitary and other pipes<br />
shall be designed as flowing half full.<br />
Page 29 of 30
(4) Type of Sewer / Material<br />
Ditch/Pipe Mat’l Manhole/Cover. Catch Basin/Cover<br />
For non-polluted: Open (V) Riprap NA NA<br />
Or Rect Brick<br />
For Oily: Pipe CS RC / CI RC / Grat’g<br />
For Sanitary: Pipe GSW Brick / CI NA / NA<br />
Legend: RC = Reinforced Concrete, RC Lin’g = RC with protective lining<br />
CS = Carbon Steel, Grat’g = Galvanized grating<br />
GSW = Glazed Stoneware, RC*1: RC with acid-proof coating.<br />
Cable Installation<br />
Cables are laid in earthen trenches in paved area & buried in unpaved area. Hume pipes &<br />
PVC conduits will be used for road crossings.<br />
Dike Wall<br />
Dike wall is of brick/stone masonry with coping. Dike wall shall confirm to standard drawing<br />
and approved plot plan layout.<br />
Boundary wall & Fence<br />
Compound wall of 3.05m (10’’) high wall with additional 0.6 m anticlimber on top. Wall will be<br />
RCC framed with brick/ rubble masonry filler.<br />
SITE PREPARATION<br />
The grading of the area shall be done by cutting & filling with the following:<br />
a) Cutting area: Thoroughly rolled & <strong>com</strong>pacted<br />
b) Filling area:<br />
Other than roads: Compacted in layers not exceeding 30cm to achieve min.95% of<br />
max. dry density. (confirming to IS-2720, part-VII)<br />
For roads: Compacted in layers not exceeding 20cm to achieve min.95% of max.<br />
dry density. (confirming to IS-2720, part-VIII)<br />
c) General site grading: 1 in 500 to 1 in 1000 (for drainage of storm water)<br />
10. SOFTWARE TO BE USED FOR THE PROJECT<br />
For Analysis and Design: STAAD.Pro 2008<br />
For Drafting: AutoCAD<br />
Page 30 of 30
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS AND ROLLING<br />
SHUTTERS<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
1. SCOPE<br />
This Specification defines the requirements regarding material, sizes, construction,<br />
workmanship, finishes and installation for doors, windows, ventilators and rolling<br />
shutters.<br />
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS<br />
2.1 Codes and Standards<br />
The Indian Standards and other referred standards (including all amendments<br />
and revisions) shall be considered as part of this Specification. In case any particular<br />
aspect of work is not covered specifically by these or any other relevant Indian Standard<br />
Specification, any other good engineering practice as may be specified by the <strong>com</strong>pany<br />
shall be followed:<br />
Following Indian standards including all amendments and revisions shall be<br />
considered as part of this <strong>specification</strong>.<br />
Indian Standards<br />
IS 205 Indian Standard Specification for non-ferrous metal butt hinges.<br />
IS 287 Indian Standard Re<strong>com</strong>mendations for permissible moisture content for<br />
timber used for different purposes.<br />
IS 303 Indian Standard Specification for plywood for general purposes. IS 513 Coldrolled<br />
low carbon steel sheets andtrips<br />
IS 710 Indian Standard Specification for Marine plywood.<br />
IS 733 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars, Rods and Sections for<br />
General Engineering Purposes.<br />
IS 737 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy sheet and strip for general engineering<br />
purposes.<br />
IS 848 Indian Standard Specification for Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood<br />
(phenolic and aminoplastic).<br />
IS 851 Synthetic resin adhesives for construction work (non-structural) in wood.<br />
IS 1003 Indian Standard Specification for Timber panelled and glazed shutters -<br />
part 1 - door shutters, Part 2 - windows and ventilator shutters.<br />
IS 1038 Indian Standard Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators.<br />
IS 1081 Indian Standard Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and<br />
aluminum) doors, windows and ventilators.<br />
IS 1141 Seasoning of Timber – Code of Practice<br />
IS 1161 Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 2 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
IS 1200 Indian Standard Specification for method of measurement of building<br />
and <strong>civil</strong> engineering works, Part 2: wood work and joinery.<br />
IS 1285 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy extruded round tube and hollow<br />
sections (for general engineering purposes).<br />
IS 1328 Veneered decorative Plywood<br />
IS 1341 Indian Standard Specification for steel butt hinges<br />
IS 1351 Indian Standard Specification for steel door frames.<br />
IS 1361 Steel Windows for Industrial Buildings<br />
IS 1477 Indian Standard Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings<br />
Part I - Pre- treatment, Part-2 Painting.<br />
IS 1642 Indian Standard Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (general):<br />
Details of construction<br />
IS 1948 Aluminum Doors, Windows and Ventilators<br />
IS 1949 Aluminum Windows for Industrial Buildings<br />
IS 2191 Indian Standard Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and<br />
hollow core typed part 1 - plywood face panels, part 2, particle board and<br />
hardboard face panels<br />
IS 2202 Indian Standard Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core<br />
type) part I - plywood face panels, part 2 - particle board face panels<br />
and hard board face panels.<br />
IS 2338 Indian Standard Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based<br />
materials, part 1 - operations and workmanship, part 2 – schedules.<br />
IS 2553 Indian Standard Specification for safety glass. part 1 - General purpose. IS<br />
2835 Indian Standard Specification for flat transparent sheet glass.<br />
IS 3087 Indian Standard Specification for wood particle boards (medium density)<br />
for general purposes.<br />
IS 3097 Indian Standard Specification for veneered particle boards.<br />
IS 3548 Indian Standard Code of practice for Glazing in buildings.<br />
IS 3614 Fire check Doors (Parts 1 & 2)<br />
IS 4020 Indian Standard Specification for door shutters, method of tests, Parts 1 to 17.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 3 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
IS 4021 Indian Standard Specification for timber door window and<br />
ventilator frames- Specifications.<br />
IS 4043 Re<strong>com</strong>mendations for symbolic designations of Direction of Closing and faces<br />
of Doors, Windows and Shutters<br />
IS 4218 ISO Metric Screw Threads (Parts 1 to 6)<br />
IS 4351 Specification for Steel Door Frames<br />
IS 4454 Steel wires for cold formed springs<br />
IS 4537 Indian Standard Specification for figured, rolled and wired glass.<br />
IS 4835 Specification for polyvinyl acetate dispersion based adhesives for wood<br />
IS 4913 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of timber<br />
doors and windows.<br />
IS 5807 Indian Standard Specification for methods of tests for clear finishes for wooden<br />
furniture, Part I - resistance to dry heat, part 2 - resistance to wet heat.<br />
IS 5986 Hot rolled steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for flanging and forming<br />
operation<br />
IS 6245 Indian Standard Specification for metal rolling shutters and<br />
rolling grills. IS 6248 Specification for Metal Rolling Shutters and<br />
Rolling Grills.<br />
IS 7452 Hot Rolled Steel Sections for Doors, Windows and Ventilators.<br />
IS 12406 Indian Standard Specification for Medium density fiber boards for<br />
general purposes.<br />
2.2 Other Standard/Specifications<br />
Specification for Concrete Work<br />
Specification for Structural Steel Work<br />
3. TIMBER DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS<br />
Design, manufacturing and installation of timber shall be in accordance with the<br />
Engineer’s drawings and the following codes IS 1003 (Parts 1 & 2), IS 2191 (Parts 1 &<br />
2), IS 2202, IS 4021, IS 4043 and IS 4913. The Contractor shall submit for the EIC’s<br />
approval one or more sample of Door, Window / Ventilator. Mass fabrication shall<br />
start only after Engineer In-charge’s (EIC) approval, taking his <strong>com</strong>ments into<br />
consideration. The Contractor shall purchase Flush Doors, Hardware and Fixtures<br />
from approved manufacturers only.<br />
3.1 Frames<br />
3.1.1 Material<br />
Superior Grade Indian Teakwood<br />
Or First Grade Deodar Wood<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 4 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
Or First Grade Non-Coniferous Timber other than Teak<br />
Seasoning of Timber shall be in accordance with IS 1141. The timber shall be free from<br />
decay, fungal growth, pitch pockets, streaks on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits<br />
and cracks. All members shall be straight without any warp or bow and shall have<br />
smooth, well planed edges at right angles to each other. The surface touching the wall,<br />
however, need not be planed. The frames shall have overall joints at the corners. The<br />
jamb post shall be through tenoned into the mortices of the transom to the full width of<br />
the transom and thickness of the tenon shall not be less than 15 mm. The tenon shall be<br />
closely fitted into the mortises and pinned with corrosion resisting star shaped metal<br />
pins not less than 8 mm dia or with wood dowels not less than 10 mm dia. The depth of<br />
the rebate in the frame for housing the shutter shall be 15 mm. The contact surfaces of<br />
tenons and mortices shall be treated with suitable adhesive. The adhesive shall be a<br />
bulk type synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS 851 or synthetic resin adhesive<br />
(Phenolic and Aminoplastic) conforming to IS 848 or polyvinyl acetate dispersion based<br />
adhesive conforming to IS 4835.<br />
3.1.2 Sizes of Frames (Unless shown differently on drawings)<br />
Door Frame: 140 x 65 mm<br />
Window/Ventilator Frame: 100 x 50<br />
The general tolerance allowed shall be + 3 mm<br />
3.1.3 Holdfasts<br />
For Door and Window Frames<br />
i. Door Frames - A minimum of 3 Holdfasts on each side<br />
ii. Window and Ventilator Frames<br />
For heights less than 1000 mm: 2 Holdfasts shall be fixed at quarter points of frame on<br />
each side. For height greater than 1000 mm: 3 Holdfasts shall be fixed on either side.<br />
iii. Holdfasts shall be MS flat 30 x 3 x 300 long, the ends of the flat being bent in<br />
opposite direction for 75 mm, leaving 150 mm between the bent ends. The face of<br />
the frame in contact with side walls and top lintel shall be given a coat of coal tar. All<br />
surfaces of the frame which are to be painted shall be given a coat of white lead<br />
based primer. In case of frames to be polished or varnished, the surface shall<br />
receive a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish. Frames without a timber threshold<br />
shall be braced with a sturdy base tie (12 mm dia MS rod) to hold the frame rigid<br />
during transit and erection.<br />
3.1.4 Installation of Frames<br />
Frames shall be installed either by “Built-in-Method” or “Prepared Opening Method”. In<br />
“Built-in- Method”, frame shall be installed at the required place. Masonry or<br />
concrete in the wall shall be built after installation of the frame so that holdfasts and<br />
pins at the bottom are well anchored into them.<br />
In the “Prepared Opening Method”, frames shall be placed in the opening already<br />
provided in the wall. The holdfasts and pins shall then be grouted, Prepared. Built-in-<br />
Method shall be preferred over Opening Method of Installation. The datum line for the<br />
sill of door, window or ventilator shall be taken from a fixed point on the wall, finished<br />
floor or ceiling with the help of a level.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 5 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
3.2 Door, Window and Ventilator Shutter<br />
3.2.1 Paneled and Glazed Shutter<br />
i. Rails, Styles, Glazing Bars<br />
The material for these shall be same as specified for frames. The jointing shall<br />
be in mortice and tenon joints.<br />
ii.<br />
Shutter Paneling<br />
The material for this can be either timber or plywood or Float glass.<br />
Timber Paneling<br />
The material shall be same as specified for the door frame. The thickness of the panel<br />
shall not be less than 15 mm. The panel shall be in one single piece and its area<br />
shall not exceed 0.5 m2. The timber panels shall be framed into the groove and<br />
faces shall be closely fitted to the sides of the groove. Additional beadings shall<br />
be provided on one or both sides if specified on drawings.<br />
Plywood Paneling<br />
This shall conform to IS 710. Thickness of plywood shall be 10 mm for 2 or more panel<br />
construction and 12 mm for single panel construction. Panels shall be fixed to the<br />
shutter frame by providing grooves in frame as described for timber panels or by using<br />
beading or both.<br />
Float Glass Panels<br />
This shall be good and durable weighing not less than 7.5 kg/m2. The glass panel shall<br />
be embedded in putty and secured to the rebate by wooden beads of suitable size and<br />
shape. For external glazed doors, windows and ventilators, beading shall be fixed from<br />
outside. The contact surfaces of tenon and mortice, tongue and grooved joints shall be<br />
treated before putting together, with suitable synthetic resin adhesive<br />
as specified for door shutter.<br />
The thickness of Door shutter shall be 40mm, while for windows/ventilators; shutters<br />
shall be 20 mm, 25 mm or 38 mm as specified on the drawings.<br />
Wherever shown in the drawings, the vision panels shall be provided in the<br />
shutters with teakwood beadings on both sides. Unless otherwise specified, the vision<br />
panel shall have minimum dimensions of 250 mm height and 200 mm width with bottom<br />
located at 1400 mm from shutter bottom.<br />
The minimum hardware and fixtures to be provided shall be according to the Table No.<br />
1 unless specified otherwise.<br />
All surfaces of door shutters which are required to be painted ultimately shall be covered<br />
with a priming coat of suitable primer. In case of doors to be polished or varnished, a<br />
priming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given before installation.<br />
4. SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 6 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
4.1 Core<br />
This shall conform to IS:2202 (Part I). It shall be made from block board consisting of<br />
pinewood strips placed end to end. The width of each strip shall not exceed 25 mm. The<br />
strips shall be placed side by side and glued together to form a slab which shall<br />
then be glued between two or more veneers. The direction of the grain of the core<br />
blocks shall be at right angles to that of the adjacent veneers.<br />
4.2 Plywood Surfacing<br />
Commercial plywood or decorative plywood conforming to IS 303 and Grade I of<br />
IS 1328 respectively shall be used. Wherever mentioned, marine grade ply conforming<br />
to IS 710 shall be used.<br />
Frame<br />
This will be provided for holding the core. The width of the frame including lipping shall<br />
be 50 to 100 mm wide.<br />
Gluing<br />
Only phenol formaldehyde resin glue shall be used.<br />
Vision Panel/Venetians<br />
These shall be provided where specified on the drawings.<br />
Hardware<br />
Minimum hardware and fixtures shall be provided as per Table 1. Additional<br />
hardware shall be as per drawings.<br />
5. STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS<br />
Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators shall conform to IS 1038, IS 1361, IS 1081 and IS<br />
4351 and shall be as per drawing issued by the EIC. The Contractor shall submit for the<br />
EIC’s approval the shop drawing covering all dimensions, details of fabrication,<br />
construction and installation. After approval of shop drawing, the Contractor shall<br />
submit one or more samples of the fabricated item of each for the EIC’s approval<br />
before mass fabrication. Engineer’s <strong>com</strong>ments if any shall be incorporated during<br />
mass fabrication.<br />
5.1 Frames<br />
Frames for Pressed Steel Door<br />
Frames shall be manufactured out of 18 gauge (1.25 mm) Galvanised Steel Sheet.<br />
Each door frame shall have hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and, if specified in drawing<br />
angle threshold. The entire assembly shall be welded. Where threshold is not<br />
specified a temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feet of the frames. The<br />
base tie shall be out of 18 gauge MS pressed steel section adjusted within floor<br />
finish thickness. The frame shall have a brass lock strike plate with mortar guard. For<br />
single leaf door, there shall be a minimum of three rubber buffers fixed to the frame. The<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 7 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
middle buffer shall be fixed on centre line of lock strike plate, and the other two 450 mm<br />
above and below the middle one. For double leaf door there shall be two rubber buffers<br />
in the head frame spaced 300 mm symmetrical about centre Line of door, and two<br />
buffers in the rebate of the lock jambs.<br />
Frames for Steel Windows and Ventilators<br />
These shall conform to IS 1361 and shall be made from rolled sections to IS<br />
7452. The steel shall conform to IS 2830 or IS 2831. The sections shall be cut and<br />
mitered. The corners of the frames shall be flash butt welded. The frames shall be<br />
square and flat. Neoprene or silicone seal weather strips shall be provided on the jambs.<br />
5.2 Shutters<br />
Pressed Steel Doors<br />
These are made from 22 gauge (0.8mm) Galvanised Steel Sheets. These shall be<br />
provided on both sides of the shutter and reinforced by MS stiffener channels from<br />
inside. All four sides of the shutter shall have an MS channel as stiffener. The shutters<br />
shall be 45 mm thick unless specified differently on drg. Space between fully flush skin<br />
sheets shall be filled with core infill of honey<strong>com</strong>b kraft paper or polyurethane<br />
foam (PUF). Vision panel and venetians shall be provided, if specified, as indicated in<br />
the drawing. The vision panels shall preferably be of flush type – 2 nos, 5 mm thk each<br />
clear float glasses with spacer frame all around and desiccants in it. The fixtures shall<br />
be provided as specified in Table 2.<br />
Windows and Ventilators<br />
Sashes shall be square and flat. Sashes shall be constructed of sections which<br />
have been cut to the required length, mitered and welded at corners. All the corners<br />
shall be through right angles and welds shall be neatly cleaned off. Tee sections for<br />
glazing shall be tenoned and riveted into the frames and where they intersect, the<br />
vertical tee shall be broached and the horizontal tee threaded through it, and the<br />
intersection closed by hydraulic pressure.<br />
5.3 Procedure for Fixing<br />
Doors, Windows and Ventilators shall not be built in at the time the walls are<br />
constructed but shall be subsequently fixed into prepared openings, in accordance with<br />
IS 1081. Holes for fixing lugs are to be left or cut, and the doors and windows fixed after<br />
all the rough masonry and plaster work has been finished. The frames of units shall be<br />
set in the opening by using wooden wedges at the jambs, sill and head, and shall be<br />
plumbed in position. The lugs shall then be grouted into their holes with concrete (1:2:4).<br />
When RCC members (beam or column) form the sides of the opening, rawl plugs shall<br />
be fixed in RCC and frames fixed to the members by 63 mm (2 ½”) x No. 10 galvanised<br />
wood screws. In the case of steel work openings a mild steel or hard wood fillet shall be<br />
provided around the frame to facilitate erection. The height of the unfinished opening<br />
shall depend on whether a threshold is required or not. While fixing the door, care shall<br />
be taken to see that at least 5 mm space is left between door shutter and finished floor.<br />
Tolerance<br />
The sizes of doors, windows and ventilators shall not vary by more than + 1.5 mm than<br />
the size specified on drawings.<br />
Finish – Doors<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 8 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
Frames and shutters shall be given a thermosetting polyester powder coating to 70<br />
micron DFT or PU paint. Colour shades shall be as specified by architects on drgs.<br />
Finish – Windows & Ventilators<br />
After the fabrication of units all the steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free of<br />
rust, mill-scale, dirt, oil, etc. and two coats of red oxide zinc chromate primer shall<br />
be applied. Two coats of approved synthetic enamel shall be applied after installation<br />
of the door, window or ventilator.<br />
6. ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS<br />
Aluminium Doors, Windows and ventilators shall conform to IS:733, IS 1948, IS:1949,<br />
and IS:1081 shall be as per drawings issued by the Engineer. The contractor shall<br />
submit for EIC’s approval the shop drawings covering all dimension details of<br />
fabrication, construction and installation. After approval of shop drawings the contractor<br />
shall submit one or more samples of the fabricated item of each type for the EIC’s<br />
approval before mass fabrication.<br />
6.1 Material<br />
Aluminium Alloy Extruded Sections<br />
Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture of doors, windows and ventilators shall<br />
conform to IS designation HE 9-WP of IS:733 or HV9-WP of IS 1285. Aluminium Alloy<br />
AA 6063 of hardness T5 or T3 which has the following properties is also acceptable,<br />
Coefficient of<br />
Density, Modulus of Ultimate Tensile<br />
0.2% Proof<br />
kg/mm<br />
Linear Expansion,<br />
Elasticity, Mpa Strength, Mpa<br />
Stress, Mpa<br />
3<br />
m/m.k<br />
2.7 x 10 -8 69 x 10 3 185 23 x 10 -8 110<br />
The sectional properties of extruded sections shall be as given in IS 733 or as<br />
manufactured by Jindal, Hindalco or Bhoruka. The section shall be uniform in<br />
appearance, free from die lines and handling marks.<br />
Glass panes<br />
Glass panes shall be annealed or float glass as specified in the drawing and shall weigh<br />
at least 7.5 kg / m2. Glass panes shall also be free from flaws, specks or bubbles. All<br />
panes shall have properly squared corners and straight edges. The sizes of glass<br />
panes for use shall be in accordance with Table I of IS:1948.<br />
Thickness of glazing to be used for various pane sizes shall be as follows:<br />
Size of Pane Thickness of glazing<br />
up to 1.2 sq.m 4 mm float glass<br />
1.2 sq.m to 2.0 sq.m 5.5 mm float glass<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 9 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
above 2.0 sq.m 8 mm float glass<br />
twin style entrance door 12 mm float glass<br />
Heat strengthening or Toughening of glass wherever required shall be as indicated on<br />
drgs.<br />
Screws, Fasteners<br />
Screws and fasteners shall be of aluminium alloy or brass oxidised. Screw thread<br />
of machine screws used in the manufacture of aluminium doors, windows and<br />
ventilators shall conform to the requirement of IS:4218.<br />
For opaque portion of shutters panels can be of 12 mm thk marine ply cladded on<br />
both sides with 24 gauge aluminium sheet.<br />
6.2 Standard sizes, tolerances and designation<br />
Size<br />
Overall dimension of windows, doors, ventilators, shall be derived from masonry<br />
opening minus an allowance of 1.25 cm clearance on all sides for the purpose of fitting.<br />
However, type and overall sizes shall be in accordance with IS:1948.<br />
Tolerances<br />
The sizes for doors, windows or ventilator frames shall not vary by more than ± 1.5 mm<br />
from overall size as specified in drawing.<br />
Designation<br />
Doors, windows and ventilators shall be designated by symbol denoting their width, type<br />
and height in succession as per IS : 1948.<br />
Sectional dimensions and weights<br />
Sectional dimensions and weights per unit length of the section shall conform to<br />
design drawing. However, uses of specific sections for specified units as per<br />
manufacturers’ standard may be used with prior approval of Engineer.<br />
6.3 Fabrication<br />
Frames<br />
Frames shall be square and flat, the corners of frame being fabricated to a true right<br />
angle. Both the fixed and opening frames shall be constructed of sections which have<br />
been cut to length, mitered and screwed at the corners.<br />
Shutters<br />
All hinges, pivots, etc. shall be provided and fabricated in accordance with provisions<br />
given in IS:1948. However, reference standards and drawings are also to be read in<br />
conjunction with the IS code.<br />
6.4 Finishing<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 10 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
The aluminum sections to be used shall be properly buffed, cleaned by using mild acids<br />
and water. Then the same shall be anodised to have average anodic film thickness of 25<br />
microns. To prevent damage to metal surfaces, a protective tape shall be applied after<br />
manufacturing and same shall be removed at site only after <strong>com</strong>pletion of rough trades.<br />
6.5 Handling, Storage<br />
The extruded section or the fabricated windows/doors shall be protected against<br />
abrasions, waterstains and any other damages caused by acids or alkaline chemicals.<br />
Cold metal shall preferably be placed in a dry storage area avoiding contact between it<br />
and other metals. Use of wood face shelving racks is re<strong>com</strong>mended. It shall also<br />
be kept away from caustics, nitrates, phosphates, acids and cement.<br />
6.6 Installation<br />
The fabricated and assembled windows or door units (without glazing) shall be installed<br />
in accordance with IS 1081 being fixed in masonry opening properly plastered and<br />
finished. Straightness and diagonal dimensions of the opening shall not have<br />
tolerance more than ± 2 mm. Aluminium screws or bolts are to be used with teak<br />
wood block on the back of the sections to avoid dents and other mechanical damages<br />
during tightening of screws/bolts. All gaps between the aluminium section and the<br />
masonry surface must be sealed with gun grade polymer based sealant viz., silicone<br />
<strong>com</strong>pound, polysulphide <strong>com</strong>pound.<br />
Cement mortar grout or cement mortar finishing of gaps after installation of aluminium<br />
units shall strictly be restricted to protect the surface treatments given to the aluminium<br />
like anodising, precoating, etc.<br />
All glass panes shall be fixed only after major activities are over in the area. Glazing<br />
gaskets for doors and frames shall be EPDM elastomeric extrusions. All screws and<br />
miscellaneous fasteners shall be aluminium, stainless steel or zinc plated.<br />
6.7 Hardware<br />
Necessary hardware for aluminium doors and windows shall be <strong>com</strong>patible with the basic<br />
material and shall be provided along with the doors, windows and ventilators.<br />
Minimum hardware necessary to be provided shall be as specified in Table 3.<br />
6.8 Drawings/Documents<br />
Prior to fabrication, Contractor shall submit shop drawing indicating details of all<br />
members, sections and hardware for EIC’s approval. All certificates against tests for<br />
anodising and other physical properties of material shall be produced to the Engineer for<br />
acceptance.<br />
7. METAL ROLLING SHUTTERS AND ROLLING GRILLS<br />
Metal Rolling Shutters and Rolling Grills shall conform to IS:6248, and shall be as per<br />
drawings issued by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit for EIC’s approval, the<br />
shop drawing covering all details of fabrication, construction and installation. After<br />
approval of shop drawing the Contractor shall submit one sample for approval before<br />
mass fabrication.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 11 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
Rolling shutters shall be of following alternative types depending on the method of<br />
operation.<br />
S.No. Type Clear Area of Remarks<br />
Shutter<br />
i. Self Coiling or Pushing Pull Up to 8 sq.m Without ball bearing<br />
Type 8 to 12 sq.m With ball bearing<br />
ii. Gear Operated<br />
12 to 25sq.m With ball bearing. Operated by<br />
bevel gear box and crank<br />
25 to 35 sq.m With ball bearing operated<br />
by chain wheel and hand<br />
iii. Electrically Operated type 35 to 50 sq.m<br />
7.1 Materials<br />
Cold Rolled Steel Strips<br />
Cold Rolled Steel Strips used for rolling shutter lath sections shall conform to temper No.<br />
5, Dead soft quality of IS 513.<br />
Mild Steel Sections<br />
Mild Steel Sheets and Plates used for manufacturing the guide channels, brackets and<br />
lock plate shall be of hot rolled steel of thickness not less than 3.15 mm conforming to<br />
IS:5986. These shall be free from surface defects and the edges shall be cleanly<br />
sheared.<br />
Steel Pipe<br />
Mild Steel Pipes used for the suspension shaft of the roller shall be heavy duty<br />
pipe suitable for mechanical purposes and shall conform to IS:1161.<br />
Cast Iron Castings<br />
Cast Iron Castings used for roller pulley wheels, U-clamps and bevel gears shall conform<br />
to Grade 15 of IS:210. These shall be free of blow holes, surface defects such as cracks,<br />
burrs etc.<br />
Springs<br />
The springs used in the roller for counter balancing the rolling shutter shall be<br />
made either from high tensile spring steel wire or flat spring steel strip.<br />
The spring steel wire used for helical spring shall conform to Grade 2 of IS:4454.<br />
Flat spring steel strip used for spiral spring shall be from 0.8 to 1.0 percent carbon steel<br />
strip especially hardened and tempered.<br />
Aluminium Alloy Sheets<br />
Aluminium Alloy Sheets used for curtains in case of rolling grills, shall conform to 52000<br />
(NS4), 53000 (NS5) or 64430 (HS30) of IS:737.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 12 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
Aluminium Alloy Extrusions<br />
Aluminium Alloy Extrusion for the <strong>com</strong>ponents of rolling shutters of aluminium<br />
shall conform to 53000 (NE5) or 64430 (HE30) of IS:733.<br />
7.2 Fabrication<br />
Curtain<br />
This shall be built up from interlocking lath sections. The lath sections shall be from 18<br />
gauge (1.25 mm) section for curtains up to 9 metres in width. Curtain above 9 metres<br />
in width should be divided in two parts with provision of one middle fixed or movable<br />
guide channel or supported from the back to resist wind pressure. The lath section shall<br />
be rolled so as to have interlocking curls at both edges and a deep corrugation at the<br />
centre with a bridge depth of 16 mm to provide sufficient curtain stiffness for resisting<br />
manual pressure and normal wind pressure. Each lath section shall be continuous single<br />
piece without any welded joint. When interlocked, the lath section shall have a<br />
distance of 75 mm between rolling centres. Each alternate lath section shall be fitted<br />
with a malleable cast iron or mild steel clips securely riveted at either end, thus locking<br />
the lath section at both ends and preventing lateral movement of the individual lath<br />
sections. The clips shall be so designed as to fit the contour of the lath sections.<br />
Lock Plate<br />
The Lock Plate provided at the bottom of the shutter, shall be <strong>com</strong>posed of a mild steel<br />
plate 3.15 mm thick, reinforced with mild steel angle 35 x 35 x 5 mm at bottom of the<br />
plate. The lock plate shall be fitted with sliding bolts at either end to engage with<br />
suitable receiving pockets at the bottom of the guide channel. The sliding bolts shall<br />
be capable of being locked by means of padlocks both from outside and inside. The<br />
lock plate shall also be provided with pulling handles, one handle for 2.5 m width<br />
and 2 handles for widths above 2.5 m. Pulling handles shall be fixed on both inside and<br />
outside faces of the lock plate.<br />
Guide Channels<br />
These shall be of mild steel deep channel section of rolled, pressed or built up<br />
(fabricated) construction. The thickness of the sheet used shall not be less than 3.15 mm.<br />
The depth of the guide should be such that there is sufficient clearance between curtain<br />
and inner surface of guide. The curtain shall project into the guide at least 40 mm for<br />
shutters up to 3.5 m width and 60 mm for greater widths. There shall be a clearance of 10<br />
mm between guide wall and the end clips of the curtain.<br />
Where the shutter is installed in heavy windy zones, special wind locking arrangements<br />
shall be provided to prevent the curtain <strong>com</strong>ing out of the guide. The clear gap on either<br />
side of the curtain and inner faces of the guide channel shall be 5 mm. The depth and<br />
width of the guide channel shall be as follows:<br />
Clear Width of Depth of Guide Channel<br />
Up to 3.5 M 65<br />
3.5 to 8.0 M 75<br />
8.0 m and above 100<br />
Width of Guide Channel shall be 25 mm for lath sections with bridge depth of about 12<br />
mm and 32 mm for lath sections with bridge depth of 16 mm.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 13 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
Fixing Cleats<br />
Each guide shall have a minimum of 3 fixing cleats. The spacing of cleats shall<br />
not exceed 0.75 m. Alternatively, the guide channels may also be provided with<br />
suitable dowels hooks or pins for embedding in the walls. The guide channel shall be<br />
attached to the wall plumb and true.<br />
Bracket Plate<br />
This shall be fabricated out of mild steel plate of 3.15 mm thick. Thicker plates may be<br />
used depending upon the height of the shutter. Dimensions shall be as given in IS:6248.<br />
The bracket plate may be square, circular or hexagonal with a U-shaped cast iron or mild<br />
steel clamp riveted or welded to it at the centre. The bracket plate should have sufficient<br />
cross sectional area to resist the shear arising out of the weight of the curtain,<br />
suspension shaft etc. and shall be held rigidly by suitable foundation bolts.<br />
Roller<br />
The suspension shaft of the roller shall be made of steel pipe conforming to heavy duty of<br />
IS:1161. The diameter shall be sufficient to limit deflection of shaft under the weight of<br />
the rolling shutter. The deflection of the shaft shall not exceed 5 mm per metre width of<br />
the shutter. Diameters of the steel pipe for various widths up to 6 m and height 5 m shall<br />
be as per IS:6248. Sizing of pipe diameter for greater widths and heights shall be<br />
designed giving due consideration for deflection limit mentioned above. The pipes of the<br />
suspension shaft which are clamped to the brackets shall be fitted with rotatable cast iron<br />
pulleys to which the curtain is attached. The pulleys and the pipe shaft shall be<br />
connected by means of pretensioned helical springs to counterbalance the weight of<br />
the curtain and to keep the shutter in equilibrium in any partly opened position.<br />
Hood Covers<br />
These shall be made of mild steel sheets not less than 0.9 mm thick, and shall be<br />
hexagonal, square or circular contour depending on the contour of the bracket<br />
plate. The hood cover shall be stiffened with angle or flat stiffeners at top and<br />
bottom edges to retain shape. The hood cover shall be fixed to the bracket plate<br />
by means of angle cleats. The hood cover shall also be supported all along the<br />
top at suitable intervals to prevent sagging.<br />
Gears, Worms etc<br />
These shall be machine cut. Worm gear wheels shall be of high grade cast iron or mild<br />
steel or phosphor bronze. The worms shall be of mild steel or gun metal or phosphor<br />
bronze.<br />
Security Devices<br />
For shutter widths exceeding 2.5 m, any one or both of the following security devices may<br />
be provided. Anchoring Rods as described in IS:6248. These shall be provided at the<br />
rate of one per extra 2.5 m width or part thereof above a clear width of 2.5 m.<br />
Central Hasp and Staple<br />
This shall be provided at the centre of the bottom lock plate. The hasp shall be<br />
embedded in the floor at the centre. The staple shall be fitted at the centre of the bottom<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 14 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
lock plate outside in an accurate position so that the hasp may properly engage with<br />
staple when the shutter is in a closed position. The hasp shall be embedded within the<br />
floor so as not to cause any obstruction. Normally one central hasp and outside staple<br />
will be sufficient for any width of shutter.<br />
7.3 Optional Features<br />
Intermediate Posts or Mullions<br />
These shall be either of fixed, sliding or removable type, and are used for unusually wide<br />
openings or for providing multiple door entries. The mullion also forms the guide channels<br />
between the various sections of the rolling shutter. The sliding mullion may also be winch<br />
operated for large sizes. The fixing of the intermediate post shall be plumb and true<br />
when in position before closing the rolling shutter.<br />
Wicket Door<br />
Large rolling shutter fixed at the main entrance of mills and factories may also be<br />
provided with a subsidiary door known as wicket door. This is a hinged service door<br />
allowing pedestrian traffic without the need of rolling up the shutter. The wicket door size<br />
shall be 600 x 1200 mm for ordinary use and 900 x 1800 mm for large installations. Sizes<br />
larger than these are not re<strong>com</strong>mended as these cause difficulties in installation and<br />
operation. The wicket door shall be of good robust construction and shall be fitted with a<br />
good lever lock operated by key and lockable from both inside and outside. The wicket<br />
door shall be erected in such a way so as not to foul with the main rolling shutter when<br />
opening or closing. The wicket door shall be swung clear of the opening before the<br />
Rolling Shutter is raised.<br />
Galvanising<br />
All <strong>com</strong>ponents of the rolling shutter may be hot dip galvanised with a zinc coating<br />
containing not less than 97.5% pure zinc. The weight of the zinc coating shall be not less<br />
than 230 g/sq. m and the coating shall be free from flaking or peeling.<br />
7.4 Operation<br />
Push Pull Type<br />
Push Pull Type shall be operated manually by pulling hooks with appropriate pulling<br />
handles in the lock plate. The length of the pulling handle shall be sufficient to push the<br />
lock plate up to the top most position.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 15 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
Gear Operated Type<br />
These shall be operated by two types of arrangement:<br />
i. by bevel gear box and<br />
crank handle<br />
ii.<br />
by chain wheel and chain.<br />
The height of the bevel gear box or the bottom of the hand chain shall be 0.85 m from floor.<br />
If specified on drawing, the crank handle operation or hand chain operation shall be provided<br />
on both sides of the wall. The gear reduction shall be calculated to reduce the pressure<br />
exerted on the crank handle or the pull exerted on the hand chain to not more than 16<br />
kgs.<br />
Electrically Operated Type<br />
These shall be operated by an electric motor operating on 400/440V, 3 phase 50<br />
cycles A.C. supply. Arrangements shall also be made for emergency mechanical operation<br />
of the rolling shutter in the event of failure of the electric equipment or electricity. The<br />
emergency mechanical operation shall be by an auxiliary chain wheel and hand chain<br />
drive. The motor shall have a push button control, with a minimum<br />
of 3 buttons marked “Up”, “Down” and “Stop”. Limit switches shall also be provided to cut off<br />
current to the motor when the shutter reaches the limit of its travel in the “Up” or “Down”<br />
directions.<br />
7.5 Rolling Grills<br />
These are similar in design and operation to Rolling shutters. Hence, all provisions of Rolling<br />
shutters are applicable to rolling grills except for the curtain. The rolling grill curtain may be<br />
manufactured out of 8 mm diameter mild steel or aluminium alloy round bars.<br />
Rolling Shutter Cum Grill<br />
These shall be provided in situation where certain amount of ventilation and safety is called<br />
for, e.g. in substations and transformer rooms. The rolling shutter may have a small grill<br />
portion as specified in the drawing the height of this grill shall generally be 500 mm.<br />
7.6 Painting<br />
All <strong>com</strong>ponents of Rolling shutter except springs and inside of guide channel shall be<br />
thoroughly cleaned free of rust, mill-scale, dirt, oil etc. and two coats of red oxide zinc<br />
phosphate epoxy paint shall be applied. Two coats of approved epoxy finish paint shall be<br />
applied after installation. Other painting systems shall<br />
be employed if specified on the drawings.<br />
Marking<br />
Each shutter shall be clearly and legibly marked with the following information:<br />
i. Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark<br />
ii. Size<br />
iii. Year of Manufacture.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 16 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
8. FIRE DOORS<br />
Fire rated doors shall be for a minimum period of two hours (unless specified<br />
otherwise) and shall be approved by Tariff Advisory Committee (TAC). If sourced from<br />
outside India, the fire labelled hollow metal doors shall be approved by Underwriters<br />
Laboratories (UL). Testing conducted by Central Building Research Institute (CBRI),<br />
Roorkee shall be produced on demand. Testing shall be as per BS 476 Part<br />
20 & 24, IS 3614 Part 2 and ISO 834.<br />
The frames shall be made of 16 gauge (1.6 mm) galvanised steel sheets pressed<br />
bent to shape using bending machine and mitred with square edges. The shutter shall<br />
be formed by machine bending of 18 gauge (1.25 mm) galvanised steel sheets in the<br />
form of hollow box making an overall thickness of min 45 mm. Other requirements of<br />
stiffeners, core infill, finish, etc to be same as for steel doors described in section 5<br />
of this <strong>specification</strong>. If vision panels are shown, the glass used shall have fire rating<br />
for same period as the door.<br />
9. PVC DOORS AND WINDOWS<br />
PVC doors and window frames shall be a <strong>com</strong>plete system manufactured from<br />
acrylic modified high quality impact resistant white (or coloured as specified)<br />
unplasticised polyvinyl chloride, reinforced, rigid multi-chamber extrusion by a suitably<br />
qualified fabricator. Door and window fabrication shall meet basic performance<br />
requirements re<strong>com</strong>mended for climatic and atmospheric conditions of site and in<br />
strict accordance with the system supplier’s re<strong>com</strong>mendations.<br />
Door/ window type, size and style shall meet requirements specified in relevant<br />
door/window schedules.<br />
Door, window design shall include factory finish glazing as required, purpose made<br />
thresholds/subcills, trickle ventilators and security/ locking devices as re<strong>com</strong>mended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
All glazing shall meet safety requirements specified by relevant building regulations.<br />
Fabricator shall submit evidence of door, window performance including method of<br />
weld finishing, weather tightness exposure category, <strong>com</strong>pliance to relevant regulations,<br />
etc for approval prior to award of contract.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 17 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
TABLE 6.1- TIMBER DOOR AND WINDOWS (MINIMUM HARDWARE)<br />
Door<br />
Window<br />
Doubl Doubl<br />
s<br />
Singl Single Doubl<br />
s<br />
Singl<br />
Fitting<br />
Ventilator<br />
s<br />
e e Leaf e Leaf e Leaf e Leaf<br />
Shutter<br />
Leaf Panele Leaf Panele Shutte Shutt<br />
Butt Hinges 100mm<br />
6 6 3 3 - - -<br />
Heav<br />
Butt Hinges 75mm<br />
Heav<br />
- - - - 4 2 2<br />
Mortice y Lock (7 1 - 1 - - - -<br />
Lever)<br />
Aldrop 300mm - 1 - 1 - - -<br />
Door Latch 300mm - 1 - 1 - - -<br />
Flush Bolt 250mm 3 - 2 - - - -<br />
Tower Bolt 250mm - 3 - 2 3 2 -<br />
Handle 150mm - 4 - 2 2 1 1<br />
Hook and Eye Stay<br />
300m<br />
- - - - 2 1 2<br />
Stoppers m (Buffers) 1 1 1 1 - - -<br />
Notes:<br />
Peg Stay 2 1 -<br />
All the fittings shall be oxidized brass type unless otherwise specified.<br />
Single leaf door shutters and ventilator shutters of more than 0.80 m width shall be<br />
provided with one extra hinge.<br />
Where height of window shutter and door leaf exceeds 1.2 m and 2.15 m<br />
respectively one extra hinge shall be provided for every additional height of 0.5 m<br />
or part thereof and length of top bolt shall be increased by the height of the<br />
shutter/leaf above 2.15 m from floor level.<br />
In double leaf shutters of doors, two tower bolts shall be fixed to the first shutter top and<br />
bottom and one<br />
to the closing shutter at the top. In case of double shutter windows, two tower bolts<br />
shall be fixed to closing shutter top and bottom and one to the first shutter at top.<br />
All hardware shall conform to the applicable Indian Standards.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 18 of 20
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOORS,<br />
WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS<br />
TABLE 6.2- STEEL DOOR AND WINDOWS (MINIMUM HARDWARE)<br />
Fittings Doors Windows Ventilators<br />
Single<br />
Shutter<br />
Double<br />
Shutter<br />
Single<br />
Shutter<br />
Double<br />
Shutter<br />
Top Hung<br />
Shutter<br />
Centre<br />
Hung<br />
Shutte<br />
4” x 4” SS 3 6 - - - -<br />
Hinges with two<br />
ball bearings<br />
Hinges (Heavy) - - 2 4 2 -<br />
75mm Wide<br />
Aldrop 300mm 1 1 - - - -<br />
Push and Pull type 2 2 - - - -<br />
Handle (100mm)<br />
SS Tower Bolts 1 3 - - - -<br />
(300mm)<br />
Two Point nose - - 1 2 1 -<br />
handle with<br />
striking plate<br />
Peg Stay 300mm - - 1 2 1 -<br />
Notes:<br />
i. All the fittings shall be in S.S. unless otherwise specified.<br />
ii.<br />
iii.<br />
iv.<br />
Single leaf door shutters and ventilator shutters of more than 0.80 m width shall<br />
be provided with one extra hinge.<br />
Where height of window shutter and door leaf exceeds 1.2 m and 2.15 m<br />
respectively one extra hinge shall be provided for every additional height of<br />
0.5 m or part thereof and length of top bolt shall be increased by the height of<br />
the shutter/leaf above 2.15 m from floor level.<br />
Double leaf shutters of doors, two tower bolts shall be fixed to the first shutter<br />
top and bottom and one to the closing shutter at the top.<br />
v. All hardware shall conform to the applicable Indian Standard.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0001 Page 19 of 20
vi.<br />
Door Closure<br />
Requirement of door closure, its type – Surface mounted or concealed, with or without Hold<br />
Open option<br />
shall be as mentioned on Architectural drg.<br />
TABLE 6.3- ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS (MINIMUM HARDWARE)<br />
Fitting<br />
s<br />
Mortice Lock 7<br />
Lever<br />
Tower s bolts<br />
300mm<br />
Butt Hinges<br />
(heavy)<br />
Floor<br />
Notes:<br />
75m<br />
Spring<br />
(Shutter on<br />
Two point nose<br />
handle<br />
with<br />
Door<br />
Casement Windows<br />
Single Shutter<br />
s<br />
Double Shutter Single Shutter Double Shutter<br />
1 1 - -<br />
1 3 - -<br />
- - 2 4<br />
1 2 - -<br />
- - 1 2<br />
striking plate<br />
Peg Stay 300mm - - 1 2<br />
i. All the fittings shall be anodized aluminium (finish <strong>com</strong>patible with original frame) type<br />
unless otherwise specified.<br />
ii.<br />
iii.<br />
iv.<br />
Single leaf door shutters and ventilator shutters of more than 0.80 M width shall be<br />
provided with one extra hinge.<br />
Where height of window shutter and door leaf exceeds 1.2 M and 2.15 M respectively,<br />
one extra hinge shall be provided for every additional height of 0.5 M or part there of.<br />
Length of top bolt shall be increased by the height of shutter / leaf above 2.15 M from<br />
floor level.<br />
In double leaf shutters of doors, two tower bolts shall be fixed to the first shutter at top &<br />
bottom and one to the closing shutter at top.<br />
v. All hardware shall conform to applicable Indian Standards.
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
1.0 SCOPE<br />
This <strong>specification</strong> covers the requirement of providing labour, material, construction<br />
aids, workmanship etc. for providing and fixing flooring, skirting and dado work on<br />
floors and walls.<br />
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES<br />
Note: - Wherever reference is made to IS Codes, on any page of this Technical<br />
Specification (including <strong>annexure</strong>s), applicable year of publication of IS Code is as<br />
stated below.<br />
Following <strong>specification</strong>s will be considered as part of this <strong>specification</strong>:<br />
IS 383-1999<br />
IS 1237-1980<br />
IS 1443-1972<br />
IS 2114 -1984<br />
IS 2571-1970<br />
IS 2386-1963<br />
(Part 1 - Part 8)<br />
IS 3461-1980<br />
IS 3462-1986<br />
IS 4441<br />
IS 4443<br />
IS 4457-1982<br />
IS 4631-1986<br />
IS 4832<br />
Part-1: 1969<br />
Part-2: 1969<br />
Part-3: 1968<br />
IS 4971<br />
IS 5318-1969<br />
IS 5491-1969<br />
IS 13712 -1993<br />
IS 13630 : (Part<br />
: Coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete.<br />
: Cement concrete flooring tiles.<br />
: Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete<br />
flooring tiles.<br />
: Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish<br />
: Code of practice for laying insitu cement concrete flooring.<br />
: Methods of test for aggregates for concrete.<br />
: Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles.<br />
: Specification for unbacked flexible PVC flooring.<br />
: Code of practice for use of silicate type Chemical resistant<br />
mortars.<br />
: Code of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant<br />
mortar.<br />
: Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid-resistant<br />
Tiles.<br />
: Code of practice for laying epoxy resin floor toppings.<br />
: Specification for Chemical Resistant Mortars.<br />
: Part-1 Silicated type.<br />
: Part-2 Resin type.<br />
: Part-3 Sulphur type<br />
: Re<strong>com</strong>mendations for selection of Industrial floor finishes.<br />
: Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile<br />
flooring.<br />
: Code of practice for laying in-situ granolithic concrete flooring<br />
topping.<br />
: Ceramic tiles -definitions, classifications, characteristics and<br />
marking<br />
: Ceramic Tiles – Methods of test<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 2 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
1 to 13)-1993<br />
IS 13753 -1993 : Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E 10%<br />
(group B III)<br />
IS 13754 -1993 : Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6% E<br />
10% (group B IIb)<br />
IS 13755 -1993 : Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3% E 6%<br />
(group B IIa)<br />
IS 13756 -1993 : Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E 3%<br />
(group B I)<br />
3.0 PRIORITY OF REQUIREMENTS<br />
In case of any variation and discrepancy in condition between the special conditions,<br />
this <strong>specification</strong> and codes, order of priority shall be as under:-<br />
(1) Special conditions<br />
(2) This <strong>specification</strong><br />
(3) Codes<br />
4.0 TYPES OF FLOORING<br />
Various types of flooring and linings materials / systems are used for floor finishing<br />
over base floor, rigid / flexible viz. concrete, metal, stone, wood, etc., for different types<br />
of applications viz. Industrial, Non-industrial.<br />
Although plain concrete Base floor as laid conforming to IS 2571 would be satisfactory<br />
for many purposes, Various types of floor hardening / topping / coating / lining are<br />
applied to improve physical, mechanical, and chemical properties of the base floor to<br />
desired extent.<br />
5.0 INDUSTRIAL FLOORING<br />
Generally in Industrial Flooring the purpose of flooring, is one or more <strong>com</strong>bination of<br />
following requirements<br />
(a) For heavy duty<br />
floors, this is subject to heavy loads, severe abrasion and impact<br />
(b) For dust free and clean environment<br />
(c) For chemical and corrosion resistance<br />
Further classification based on material / system used is stated in the subsequent<br />
paragraphs.<br />
6.0 METALLIC FLOORING<br />
For all Industrial plant floors subject to heavy loading, plants requiring dust proof and<br />
wear resistant floors, use of Metallic floor replaces the brittle, dusty granular properties<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 3 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
of a plain cement floor with toughness, ductility and wear resistant properties of the<br />
Metallic surfaces.<br />
6.1 Artificial Patent Stone (APS) Flooring<br />
Artificial Patent Stone (APS) Flooring shall be laid in overall thickness of 40mm over<br />
sub base and shall conform to IS: 5491 in workmanship.<br />
Base layer shall be 25mm thick in M15 grade concrete and wearing layer shall be<br />
15mm thick in 1:3 (1 cement: 3 course sand by volume)<br />
Base layer shall be laid over sub base in alternate panels in desired shape and<br />
pattern. Each panel shall not exceed 1.5m in width. Panel shall be bound by 3x30 PVC<br />
strip panel dividers, fixed in position with their top at proper level maintaining the<br />
required levels, slopes, linearity, etc. as required. Before laying the base course, neat<br />
cement slurry @ 2.75 kg of cement per sq. meter of area shall be applied by brush<br />
over the prepared sub base. The border of the panel shall have metered joints at the<br />
corner of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line with panel joints.<br />
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with trowel and finished<br />
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.<br />
Necessary slope shall be provided.<br />
Wearing layer shall be laid within 15 minutes of laying base layer. The cement and<br />
aggregates for the top layer shall be mixed dry. After mixing, sufficient quantity of<br />
washed sand and water shall be added to make the mix plastic but not flowing. The top<br />
and bottom layer shall firmly grip together. The base course shall be free of excessive<br />
moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry cement, cement sand mixture<br />
sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb excessive moisture shall not<br />
be permitted.<br />
While the concrete is still green, cement @ 2.75 kg per Sq.M of floor area shall be<br />
mixed with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. It shall be pressed<br />
twice by means of iron floats, once when the slurry is applied and second time when<br />
the cement starts setting. The junction of floor with wall plaster, cladding, skirting shall<br />
be rounded off uniformly up to a radius of 25mm unless otherwise mentioned.<br />
Each finished portion of floor, on <strong>com</strong>pletion shall be kept wet with ponding for a<br />
minimum period of 7 days<br />
Skirting shall be 18 mm thick laid with cement mortar (1 cement: 3 coarse sand by<br />
volume. The surface on which the skirting is to be applied shall be prepared and<br />
skirting shall be laid. The junction between flooring and wall shall be rounded off to a<br />
radius of 25mm if not otherwise mentioned. While the mortar is still green, cement @<br />
2.75Kg per square meter shall be mixed with water to form thick slurry and applied<br />
over the mortar. It shall be pressed twice by means of iron floats, once when the slurry<br />
is applied and second time when the cement starts setting. The skirting shall be cured<br />
for 7 days.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 4 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
6.2 APS Flooring with Ironite Topping (Heavy Duty Flooring)<br />
Heavy Duty Flooring shall be laid in overall thickness of 50mm over sub base and shall<br />
conforming to IS: 5491 in workmanship.<br />
Base layer shall be 35mm thick in cement concrete (1 cement: 1.5 coarse sand: 3.5<br />
stone aggregates of 10mm to 6mm size by volume). Base layer shall be laid over sub<br />
base in alternate panels in desired shape and pattern. Each panel shall not exceed<br />
1.5m in width. Panel shall be bound by 3x30 PVC strip panel dividers, fixed in position<br />
with their top at proper level maintaining the required levels, slopes, linearity, etc. as<br />
required. Before laying the base course, neat cement slurry @ 2.75 kg of cement per<br />
sq. meter of area shall be applied by brush over the prepared sub base. The border of<br />
the panel shall have metered joints at the corner of the room and intermediate joints<br />
shall be in straight line with panel joints. Cement concrete shall be placed in position<br />
and beaten with trowel and finished smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is<br />
found covered with cream of mortar. Necessary slope shall be provided.<br />
Wearing Top layer/ finishing layer shall be of cement, hardener and stone aggregate<br />
mix of 15mm thickness laid over the base course. Unless otherwise mentioned, one<br />
part of approved quality hardener and four parts of cement by weight shall be mixed<br />
dry. This dry mixture shall be mixed with stone grit of 6mm and down size in the ratio<br />
of 1 hardener and cement mixture: 2 stone grit by volume. Just enough water shall<br />
then be added to the mix. The mixture so obtained shall then be laid on the base<br />
course within 2 to 4 hours of latter's laying. It shall be firmly pressed into bottom<br />
concrete so as to have a good bond with it. After the starting of initial setting, the<br />
surface shall be finished smooth and true with steel floats.<br />
Each finished portion of floor, on <strong>com</strong>pletion shall be kept wet with ponding for a<br />
minimum period of 7 days.<br />
6.3 Readymade Brands<br />
Various brands of metallic floor toppings are available from various manufacturers viz.<br />
Euco Plate and Diamond Plate from STP Ltd., Chapdur from Sica Qualcrete Ltd.<br />
7.0 NON-METALLIC FLOORING<br />
Epoxy resins on account of their qualities of adhesion and chemically resistant are<br />
used for non-metallic floor topping.<br />
For industrial plant where floors requiring dust reduction and oil resistance, Non-Metallic<br />
flooring is re<strong>com</strong>mended. Various brands of Epoxy floor hardeners are available for floor<br />
hardening while later is still “Green”. Topping, Coating or Lining shall be applied as per the<br />
extent of requirements specified by Engineer-In-Charge.<br />
Types and Applications of Epoxy Resin / Non - metallic flooring are stated below.<br />
7.1 Trowel Type<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 5 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
This is usually heavily filled with sand or other suitable aggregate and the <strong>com</strong>pound is<br />
applied by trowel. Such <strong>com</strong>pounds are often referred to as mortars or screeds.<br />
Application of 5 mm to 6mm thick screed for monolithic, dust free, abrassion resistant,<br />
anti skid chemical resistant flooring is re<strong>com</strong>mended to obtain satisfactory<br />
performance.<br />
7.2 Flow Type<br />
This is usually a solventless <strong>com</strong>pound containing filler and pigment and the mixture<br />
when poured directly on to the surface will flow and level itself often with little<br />
assistance to form a smooth continuous coating. Applications of 150 to 300 micron<br />
thick coating for abrassion resistant and dust free flooring, and 1.5 mm to 2 mm thick<br />
self levelling floor topping for factory floors is re<strong>com</strong>mended.<br />
7.3 Terrazzo Floors<br />
The Portland cement in the conventional terrazzo floors is replaced by epoxy resin<br />
binder. Such flooring formulations serve the dual purpose of providing a good<br />
appearance and chemical resistance. Minimum thickness re<strong>com</strong>mended is 10 mm.<br />
7.4 Non-skid Floors<br />
This type of floor may be prepared by sprinkling a suitable grit on an epoxy floor<br />
topping when the later is still in a tacky state.<br />
7.5 Materials<br />
7.5.1 Epoxy Resin Blend<br />
This shall be based on a liquid epoxy resin (which is usually a condensation product of<br />
Bisphenol) with or without constituents such as plasticizers, diluents and special pigments<br />
as may be necessary.<br />
7.5.2 Hardener Blend<br />
This shall contain a chemical, usually an amine, and amine - adduct or polyamide which will<br />
react with the epoxy resin at ambient temperatures to give a cured thermoset resin product.<br />
Hardeners based on amines and amine-adducts exhibit higher chemical resistance than<br />
polyamides but polyamide hardeners must be used where floors are exposed to frequent<br />
impact stress and fluctuations in temperature<br />
7.5.3 Aggregates<br />
Selected dry aggregates, such as quartz sand or calcined bauxite grit with graded particle<br />
size as re<strong>com</strong>mended by the resin manufacturer shall be supplied as a separate<br />
<strong>com</strong>ponent.<br />
7.5.4 Coal Tar<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 6 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
Coal tar extenders are used to lower the cost and increase the flexibility of epoxy resin<br />
formulations. Besides, coal tar blending increases the resistance of water although the<br />
mechanical and chemical resistance properties are lowered.<br />
Note: The resin, hardener and aggregate shall be mixed in the proportion as specified<br />
by the Engineer-In-Charge or Manufacturer’s Specification and used as<br />
specified in this standard.<br />
7.6 Surface Preparation<br />
7.7 Laying<br />
To ensure proper adhesion of the Epoxy resin mix, surface shall be cleaned, free from<br />
grease and oil, dry and rough.<br />
All laitance shall be removed from concrete surface washing the floor with dilute<br />
Hydrochloric Acid. Sand blasting or hacking may be adopted for roughening the<br />
surface.<br />
All cracks and broken areas on an existing concrete base shall be sealed / filled with<br />
fresh concrete before application of Epoxy resin topping.<br />
Grease and oil shall be removed by washing the surface with solvents such as<br />
Acetone or a suitable detergent.<br />
7.7.1 Mixing of Epoxy resin blend<br />
The constituents required for a particular epoxy resin topping shall be mixed just before<br />
use, in correct proportion specified by the Manufacturer. The order of addition of the<br />
<strong>com</strong>ponents shall be resin, hardener and aggregate (in dry condition) and duration of<br />
mixing shall be adequate to ensure through mixing.<br />
7.7.2 Application<br />
Application of blended epoxy resin topping shall be done uniformly over the prepared area<br />
to give the required thickness. The floor area may be divided in sections to get uniform<br />
thickness.<br />
7.8 Manufacturers<br />
For non-metallic flooring, chemical products from various manufacturers are available<br />
viz. FOSROC, SICA QUALCRETE MC-BAUCHEMIE, STP. LTD., CHEMBOND etc.<br />
Note: Engineer-In-charge shall approve Product and Manufacturer prior to its use in<br />
the works<br />
7.9 Other Types of Industrial Flooring<br />
7.9.1 Acid Resistant Tiles / Bricks<br />
Acid Resistant Tiles are used in flooring and lining to prevent corrosion of surface by<br />
acids and other chemicals as well as to resist abrassion on floors. These tiles are<br />
made up of materials like clay, feldspar, quartz, and talc and vitrified at high<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 7 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
temperatures in ceramic kilns and kept unglazed to prevent slipperiness when laid on<br />
floor.<br />
Chemical resistant mortars as per IS 4832 are used for laying these tiles. Laying and<br />
finishing procedure similar to the other glazed ceramic tiles described elsewhere.<br />
7.9.2 FRP Grating / Plate Flooring<br />
Fiber glass Reinforced polyester (FRP) Grating / Plate Flooring are available in standard<br />
size panels and are suitable for industrial flooring viz. Platform Staircase, Ramps, Catwalk,<br />
and Trench covers etc.<br />
7.9.3 Manufacturers<br />
1. CHEMGRATE CORP. of USA FRP Products under Brand names CHEMGRATE,<br />
CHEMPLATE, and CHEMTREAD etc.<br />
2. INTERNATIONAL GRATING INC of USA FRP Products under Brand names<br />
KORDEK GRATING / PLATE etc.<br />
8.0 NON INDUSTRIAL FLOORING<br />
These are used for non-industrial purpose viz. <strong>com</strong>mercial and residential flooring where<br />
light duty, dust free, clean environment and decorative purposes are governing criteria for<br />
choosing type of floor finishes. These are described below:<br />
8.1 Plain Cement concrete / Mosaic / Terrazzo Flooring<br />
8.1.1 In Situ Work<br />
Methods <strong>com</strong>monly adopted for laying In-Situ Terrazzo Finish Surface shall be as per<br />
IS 2114.<br />
8.1.2 Tiling Work<br />
Terrazzo/Mosaic tiles shall be of approved colour and size and shall be 25 mm thick unless<br />
otherwise specified.<br />
a) Tolerance<br />
Tolerance on length or breadth shall be plus or minus one millimeter and on<br />
thickness plus 3 mm.<br />
b) Wearing layer<br />
Minimum wearing layer shall not be less than 5 mm for tiles. Color and texture<br />
of the wearing layer shall be uniform throughout its thickness.<br />
c) Resistance to wear<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 8 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
When tested as per IS 1237, the thickness of wearing shall not be more than<br />
3.5 mm for tiles.<br />
The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the Engineer-In-Charge, samples of the<br />
tiles proposed to be used for the work and shall obtain his approval before<br />
placing the order.<br />
The colour and quality of tiles used in work shall be similar to the sample<br />
approved. If after polishing it is revealed that the quality is not the same as per<br />
the sample, the work shall be rejected and shall be redone as instructed at the<br />
CONTRACTOR's cost.<br />
For odd shaped size, the tiles shall be cut to the required size without<br />
damaging the tiles.<br />
d) Laying of tiles<br />
Surface Preparation:<br />
The base courses either P.C.C. or R.C.C. slab shall be brushed with a stiff<br />
bristle broom removing all laitance. The brooming shall expose some of the<br />
aggregates and roughen the surface adequately to provide a mechanical bond<br />
for the topping. The base shall be cleared of any deposition i.e. grease, oil,<br />
paint etc. on its surface which will interfere with the bond and thoroughly<br />
cleaned of loose particles and dust with water by scrubbing with stiff brush.<br />
Foreign substance not removed by scrubbing shall be chipped off. After the<br />
base is chipped clean, it shall be saturated with water overnight. If specified,<br />
proprietary brand adhesive solution of approved make shall be applied as per<br />
manufacturer's <strong>specification</strong> to the old concrete surface so as to ensure proper<br />
bond between old concrete surface and new in-situ topping.<br />
Bedding:<br />
Levels of prepared surface to be checked and verified before starting any<br />
bedding work. Mortar pads shall be provided at suitable intervals to establish<br />
the level and slope for the tiling work. Minimum 20mm thick under bed of 1:6<br />
cement mortars spread uniform on the prepared concrete floor base and<br />
<strong>com</strong>pacted to proper grade.<br />
The method of laying the tiles shall be in accordance with IS 1443. Before the<br />
tiles are laid these shall be soaked in water for about 15 minutes and then<br />
allowed to dry out for the same time. Just prior to laying the tiles, cement slurry<br />
of the consistency of a thick paint at the rate of 4 kg per square meter shall be<br />
spread over a small area of mortar bed at a time and then the tiles shall be set<br />
on it in the desired pattern. Each tile shall be gently tapped with wooden mallet<br />
till it is properly bedded. As each tile is placed, its surface level shall be<br />
checked and any unevenness shall be corrected by rectifying the mortar bed.<br />
The tiles shall be laid with the side edges absolutely touching each other so<br />
that the joints shall be as fine and imperceptible as possible. After the entire<br />
floor of each room is <strong>com</strong>pleted, slurry of the same coloured cement as the<br />
colour of the tiles shall be spread over the surface and rubbed in so as to seal<br />
even the thinnest joints between the tiles and then make the surface<br />
impervious. Nobody shall be allowed to walk over the flooring during the first 24<br />
hours. As soon as the cement slurry in the joints has hardened, the surface<br />
shall be kept continually wet for at least 7 days.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 9 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
14 days after laying the tiles, the surface shall be ground smooth with an<br />
approved type of grinding machine, with carborundum stones of 48 to 60 grit.<br />
The floor shall be kept wet during the grinding process. Materials ground off<br />
shall be removed by squeezing and flushing with water.<br />
Any air holes, pits or other blemishes observed in the surface shall then be<br />
filled with paste made of 1:2 cement and marble powder and water. After the<br />
patch filler has hardened the floor shall be cured for another 7 days. The<br />
surface shall then receive the second and the final grinding with successive<br />
grades of carborundum stones of 120 and 220 to 350 grit respectively until a<br />
uniformly smooth and even surface is obtained. Finally it shall be thoroughly<br />
washed with soap water and mopped clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer-<br />
In-Charge.<br />
e) Skirting<br />
The skirting shall be of the same materials as that of the floor tiles and shall be<br />
of the exact size specified. It shall be fixed to the wall with cement mortar 1:4<br />
bedding. Grinding and polishing shall be carried out by hand using<br />
carborundum of appropriate quality.<br />
f) Applications<br />
For Non plant building floorings.<br />
g) Manufacturers<br />
Various Manufacturers are available. viz. NITCO, KAJARIA , SPARTECH etc.<br />
Note: Sample and Manufacturers shall be approved by Engineer-In-charge prior to its<br />
use in the work.<br />
8.2 Stone / Marble / Granite Flooring<br />
Shahabad, Kota, Cuddapah, Stones are readily available in rough or smooth surfaces in<br />
tile or slab forms and are generally used for non-industrial and light industrial flooring<br />
purposes where rigid, non porous floor finish is required. Where decorative and easier to<br />
clean, longer lasting floor finish is required, marble and Granite may be used. Tiles or slabs<br />
of marble and granite may be fixed by cement mortar or chemical adhesive to the base<br />
floor.<br />
8.2.1 APPLICATION<br />
Stone flooring shall be laid in minimum 40mm overall thickness over sub base. For steps,<br />
joints in floor shall be permitted only when width / length is more than 0.6 / 2 meter.<br />
Thickness of the stone slabs shall be 25mm for floor and tread & 18mm for dado / skirting.<br />
Skirting shall normally be 125mm high unless specified otherwise.<br />
PREPARATION OF BASE<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 10 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
The base courses either P.C.C. or R.C.C. slab shall be brushed with a stiff bristle<br />
broom removing all laitance. The brooming shall expose some of the aggregates and<br />
roughen the surface adequately to provide a mechanical bond for the topping. The<br />
base shall be cleared of any deposition i.e. grease, oil, paint etc. on its surface which<br />
will interfere with the bond and thoroughly cleaned of loose particles and dust with<br />
water by scrubbing with stiff brush. Foreign substance not removed by scrubbing shall<br />
be chipped off. After the base is chipped clean, it shall be saturated with water<br />
overnight. If specified, proprietary brand adhesive solution of approved make shall be<br />
applied as per manufacturer's <strong>specification</strong> to the old concrete surface so as to ensure<br />
proper bond between old concrete surface and new in-situ topping.<br />
LAYING<br />
The mortar shall be 15mm thick in 1:6 (1Cement: 6 Coarse sand by volume) for flooring<br />
and 12mm thick in 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) for skirting. The mortar shall<br />
be laid for fixing one slab at a time. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. After<br />
laying once over cement mortar bedding, the slab shall be pressed, tapped gently to bring it<br />
in level, then lift & laid aside. Top surface of mortar then shall be corrected by adding fresh<br />
mortar at hollows & depressions. The mortar shall then be allowed to harden & cement<br />
slurry of honey likes consistency @ 4.4 Kg of cement per Sq. M. shall be spread over<br />
mortar. The slab edges shall be buttered with white cement (with necessary pigment) grout<br />
to match the shade of slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position & tapped with<br />
wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level.<br />
The slabs in flooring shall continue for not less than 10mm under the plaster / skirting.<br />
GRINDING & POLISHING<br />
Grinding (with machine except for skirting & small areas) shall be <strong>com</strong>menced when the<br />
joints are properly set. First grinding shall be done with carborundum stones of 48 to 60<br />
grade grit filled in machine. Water shall be properly used during grinding.<br />
When the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be cleaned with water baring all pin<br />
holes. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of cement mixed with pigments to match with<br />
colour of the stone. This grout shall be kept moist for a weak. Thereafter the second<br />
grinding shall be started with Carborundum stone of 120grit. Grinding & curing shall follow<br />
again.<br />
Final grinding shall be with Carborundum of grade 220 to 350 grit using water in<br />
abundance. The floor shall be washed clean with water, oxalic acid powder shall then be<br />
dusted at 35 gms / Sq. M on surface rubbed with machine fitted Hessian bobs or rubbed<br />
hard with woolen rags. The floor shall then be washed clean & dried with a soft cloth or<br />
linen.<br />
If any stone slab is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced & properly jointed<br />
& polished.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 11 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
8.3 Ceramic Tile Flooring<br />
Ceramic tiles shall be of approved make, size and shade and shall conform to IS 13756. No<br />
cracked, chipped or wrapped tiles shall be used in the works. Surface of the tile can be<br />
smooth, profiled, wavy, decorated, glossy, matt, etc.<br />
8.3.1 Surface Preparation<br />
All masonry faces shall be cleaned thoroughly by removing dirt, loose mortar, efflorescence<br />
etc. The concrete surfaces shall be brushed to remove all laitance and roughened to<br />
provide a bond for the bedding.<br />
8.3.2 Fixing tiles<br />
The masonry and concrete faces shall be given a coat of cement plaster 12 mm thick<br />
(in proportion 1:4). The surface of the plaster shall be scarified with wire brush for<br />
getting a good bond between the tiles and the bedding.<br />
The tiles shall be soaked in clean water for about half an hour before using. After<br />
soaking, tiles shall be removed from water and stacked on clean surface. The back of<br />
the tile shall be buttered with 1:2 plastic cement mortar to a thickness slightly in excess<br />
of the finished thickness required and the tile pressed to the wall and tapped back in<br />
position. Alternatively a rich fatty mortar shall be applied on the bedding and the tile<br />
pressed into it, care being taken to ensure that the keys of the tiles are buttered up<br />
with mortar.<br />
It shall be ensured that the back of the tile is solid over the whole area. Joints shall be<br />
uniform, even, straight and as thin as possible in any case not more than 3.0 mm.<br />
Surfaces of tiles having been fixed, the joints shall be cleaned of gray cement and<br />
refilled with cement paste of the same shade as that of the tiles. The tiled surface shall<br />
be left wet for a period of 7 days.<br />
Glazed rounded corner convex or concave shall be provided where specified and no<br />
extra cost will be paid for the same.<br />
After the <strong>com</strong>pletion of the work the surface shall be cleaned of all stains etc.<br />
Alternatively tiles may be fixed with Tile Adhesive chemicals of which, various<br />
proprietary brands are available. In such case soaking of tile with water before using<br />
shall not be done. Manufacturer’s <strong>specification</strong> shall be used for Tile adhesive fixing.<br />
8.3.3 Applications<br />
Generally used for walls and floors of toilets and kitchens etc., where constant risk of<br />
spoiling interior finish due to water, is there. Also it can be used elsewhere for decorative<br />
surface and clean environment.<br />
8.3.4 Manufacturers<br />
Ceramic Tiles shall be of approved manufacturers such as HR JOHNSON, HINDUSTAN<br />
SANITARYWARE, NITKO, KAJARIA or equivalent.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 12 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
Note: Sample and Manufacturers shall be approved by Engineer-In-charge prior to its<br />
use in the work.<br />
8.4 PVC Flooring<br />
PVC Flooring provides dust-free, noise absorbing, resilient, non-porous, decorative surface.<br />
The two types of PVC Flooring are as follows:<br />
(a) Flexible PVC Flooring<br />
(b) Rigid PVC Flooring<br />
Flexible PVC Flooring is available in sheet form is suitable for lighter traffic.<br />
Flexible PVC flooring are not suitable for areas exposed to continuous sun light<br />
and rain. Flexible PVC Flooring is liable to be damaged by burning cigarette<br />
stumps. Thickness of sheet shall be 2mm unless specified otherwise.<br />
8.4.1 Adhesive<br />
Rigid PVC flooring is available in standard tile sizes such as 300 mm x 300 mm<br />
and <strong>com</strong>paratively more suitable for heavy traffic and rigid floors. Thickness of tile<br />
shall be 2mm unless specified otherwise.<br />
The size, type and shade of the tiles shall be as specified and/or as directed by the<br />
Engineer-In-Charge and conforming to IS 3461/ IS 3462. PVC Flooring shall be<br />
anti-static type.<br />
The adhesive shall be of the type and make re<strong>com</strong>mended by the manufacturer of<br />
P. V. C. tiles. Preparation and laying shall be done as per IS 5318.<br />
8.4.2 Surface Preparation<br />
For concrete base floor, surface shall be scraped free of all foreign material and swept<br />
clean. Surface shall be kept wet for 24 hours by sprinkling water and then screed topping<br />
(1:3 cement mortar) of 3 mm thickness shall be provided over the concrete to get required<br />
even and levelled surface. Before laying is undertaken, it shall be ensured that the<br />
prepared surface is even and perfectly dry.<br />
8.4.3 Laying<br />
The adhesive shall be spread evenly on the base and on the back of the tiles as prescribed<br />
by the manufacturer. Time shall be allowed, for the solvent in the adhesive to evaporate.<br />
The tiles shall then be pressed firmly into contact with the surface and smoothed down with<br />
a suitable tool. Weights shall be used to avoid tendency of curling. Immediately after, the<br />
tiles shall be rolled with 5 kg wooden roller to get the tiles bonded down properly. The tiles<br />
shall be laid with butt joints throughout and the joints shall be very fine. After laying, any<br />
adhesive sticking to the surface of the tiles shall be removed immediately and shall not be<br />
allowed to harden. After a week of laying the surface shall be cleaned with mild soap and<br />
wet cloth.<br />
8.4.4 Manufacturers<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 13 of 14
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FLOORING WORK<br />
1. PVC flexible flooring sheets under brand name Wonder Floors by Premier Vinyl<br />
Flooring, “Armstrong” or equivalent.<br />
2. PVC flooring Tiles under brand name Marblex by Bhor Industries, “Armstrong” or<br />
equivalent.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0002 Page 14 of 14
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING<br />
AND FALSE FLOORING WORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0003<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING<br />
AND FALSE FLOORING WORK<br />
1.0 FALSE CEILING<br />
False ceiling shall be of gypsum board or Aluminium panel wherever specified in<br />
drawing or as directed by Engineer-in-charge.<br />
FIXING SUPPORT SYSTEMS<br />
CONCEALED G. I. FRAME WORK<br />
In this system G.I. <strong>com</strong>ponents are used to form a suspended framework of size 610<br />
mm x 1220 mm. For sections refer table below:<br />
EXPOSED ALUMINUM FRAME WORK<br />
In this system, various aluminum sections are suspended from ceiling to form a<br />
modular grid. For sections refer table below:<br />
Exposed<br />
Concealed G. I.<br />
Aluminium<br />
T-Section Section<br />
Perimeter L-25 Type Section U-25 Type Section<br />
Section<br />
Intermediate -- U-45 or C-48<br />
Support<br />
Type Section<br />
1220 mm c/c<br />
Main T-2535 Type<br />
Section<br />
W-Type Section<br />
@<br />
Section @ 615 mm c/c 610 mm c/c<br />
T-35 Type Section<br />
@ 615 mm c/c<br />
Cross T-25 type section W-flat Type /<br />
Section @ 1230 mm c/c W - Type Section<br />
@ 1220 mm c/c<br />
T-35 Type Section<br />
@ 1230 mm c/c<br />
Suspenders G. I / M. S. Flat G. I / M. S. Flat<br />
or Adjustable M.S.<br />
Rod<br />
or Adjustable M.S.<br />
Rod<br />
FIXING CEILING BOARDS / TILES<br />
Various types of ceiling Board / Tiles are available from various Manufacturers. Fixing<br />
of ceiling boards / tiles to GI or Aluminium frame work by means of self tapping<br />
screws as indicated in Drawing or as per manufacturer’s <strong>specification</strong>s as approved<br />
by Engineer-In-Charge.<br />
The perforations shall be either uniform or at random as approved by Engineer-Incharge.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0003 Page 2 of 5
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING<br />
AND FALSE FLOORING WORK<br />
Necessary openings shall be provided in the false ceiling work for air-conditioning,<br />
lighting and other fixtures. Perforated fiberboard, if used, shall have beveled<br />
edges. The boards shall be flame proof or flame retardant quality. It is imperative<br />
that false ceiling should be perfectly level and all joints uniform. Workmanship shall<br />
be of the highest order. After the work is <strong>com</strong>pleted, the false ceiling shall be given<br />
2 coats of decorative coating of approved shed as specified by Engineer-Incharge.<br />
1.1 ALUMINIUM LUXALON FALSE CEILING :<br />
This work item shall be applied to providing & fixing luxalon lineal ceilings over<br />
Aluminium frame backing.<br />
1.1.1 MATERIALS:<br />
1. Suspension System - 4 mm galvanized steel wire rod with special height<br />
adjustment clips. Wall angles to be 25mm x 25mm x 1.6mm aluminium<br />
perimeter angles.<br />
2. Spacing of hanger rods - 1200 mm C/C maximum<br />
3. Size of Aluminium panel carrier - 62 mm wide, 29 mm deep and 0.95 mm thick<br />
of standard module of 100 mm.<br />
4. Spacing of Aluminium panel carriers:<br />
(a)<br />
(b)<br />
1700 mm C/C without insulation<br />
1500 mm C/C with insulation<br />
5. Aluminium panels - 84 mm wide x 16 mm deep x0.5 mm thick made of Dye-cast<br />
Powder coated aluminium (LUXALON or equivalent)<br />
6. Insulation: 25 mm Insulation material shall be long fiber resin bonded mineral<br />
wool spintex 300 (48 kg/m 3 ) conforming to IS 8183.(Only if specified in Bill of<br />
Quantity)<br />
1.1.2 SCOPE OF WORK<br />
Work elements to be included:-<br />
1. Procuring & transporting all materials at site of work.<br />
2. Fixing hangers for frame work support including all threading, welding to the<br />
inserts or brackets in RC slabs, beams or structural steel roof at specified<br />
spacing as per drawing or manufacturer’s <strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
3. Providing and fixing Aluminium panel carriers of specified size at specified<br />
spacing as per drawing or manufacturer’s <strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
4. Providing and fixing Aluminium edge covers as per drawing or manufacturer’s<br />
<strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0003 Page 3 of 5
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING<br />
AND FALSE FLOORING WORK<br />
5. Providing access panels at places indicated for air conditioning works and<br />
electrical works.<br />
6. Providing panels of specified size for ceiling hung electrical fittings.<br />
7. Providing and placing insulation as per drawing (Only if specified in Bill of<br />
Quantity)<br />
8. Fixing Aluminium panels of specified shape/size to the carriers.<br />
9. Protecting false ceiling work till FINAL ACCEPTANCE.<br />
10. Erection of temporary scaffold.<br />
2.0 FALSE FLOORING<br />
This <strong>specification</strong> covers the requirements of false flooring work over concrete grade<br />
slab. The False flooring system shall be of approved make (“USG” or approved<br />
equivalent)<br />
FIXING SUPPORT SYSTEMS<br />
This system consists of pedestal studs made of galvanized Mild steel seamless pipe<br />
30mm dia x 2.5mm thick and having thread at top and bottom for attaching to top head<br />
attachment and fixing to base plate. Pedestal base plate shall be 100mm x 100mm x 8<br />
thick galvanized mild steel.<br />
Channel stringers made of galvanized, machine cut, cold rolled mild steel channels of<br />
size 30 mm x 20 mm and 1.6 mm thickness.<br />
Top head attachment shall be made of pressure die cast aluminium alloy and shall be<br />
provided with check nuts at bottom for attaching top head thread in the shed allowing<br />
for adjustment up to 25 mm up and down. Fixing of jacks, stringer and false floor<br />
boards will be as per manufacturer <strong>specification</strong>s (“USG” or equivalent) as approved<br />
by Engineer In-charge.<br />
Pedestal base plates shall be fixed to the base floor by 6mm dia, 40mm long dash<br />
fasteners as per the grid.<br />
The pedestal stud locations shall ensure the grid work as per flooring pattern which in<br />
general shall be of 610 mm x 610 mm dimension. The length of the pedestal studs<br />
shall be such that clear cavity between false flooring and base flooring is of desired<br />
depth.<br />
The top head attachments shall be inserted into the studs and shall be adjusted to<br />
obtain proper level of the finished floor panels by means of the adjustment nuts.<br />
Stringer channels then shall be fitted onto the top heads in position to form the<br />
supporting grid work for the floor panels checking the level once again by adjusting the<br />
nut position if necessary. Now the check nut shall be finally tightened to secure the<br />
final level. Floor panels as specified shall be placed over the stringer channels.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0003 Page 4 of 5
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALSE CEILING<br />
AND FALSE FLOORING WORK<br />
Each floor panel shall be marked with positional numbering on the underneath. The<br />
finished floor panels shall be perfectly leveled, aligned without any gaps in between the<br />
panels.<br />
Each individual panel shall be removable maintenance purpose. Necessary cut-outs<br />
shall be made in the panels for cable routing, control panel fixation etc. as per drawing.<br />
Necessary ramps, slopes, steps etc. shall be also provided for as per drawing. Around<br />
a control panel/ rack, the residual space left out shall be filled up with cut panels of<br />
uniform size as required to fully close the gap between the adjacent full panel and the<br />
control panel base channel. In this case the part floor panel shall extend up to the full<br />
width of the base channel and the cut size shall be determined accordingly. An<br />
additional row of jack pedestals shall be provided along the cut out on which the edge<br />
of the floor panel shall rest and over which the base channel of control panel shall be<br />
placed. It shall not directly rest on the jack head pedestal or grid channels.<br />
The cavity between false flooring and base floor shall be properly cleaned and made<br />
dust free.<br />
The finished false flooring shall be able to serve for a distributed load of 1250 kg/ sq. m<br />
FIXING CEILING BOARDS / TILES<br />
Various types of Flooring Board / Tiles are available from various Manufacturers.<br />
Fixing of flooring boards to frame work by means of screws or nails etc. as indicated<br />
in Drawing and or as per manufacturer’s <strong>specification</strong>s as approved by Engineer-in-<br />
Charge.<br />
The boards shall be flame proof or flame retardant quality. It is imperative that false<br />
flooring should be perfectly level and all joints uniform. Workmanship shall be of the<br />
highest order.<br />
Floor panel of 610 mm x 610 mm in general 35 mm thickness make of unviniard<br />
three layer flat pressed teak wood particle board. Finished on the underneath<br />
side with 0.05 mm al foil finished on the top with at least 2mm thick antistatic<br />
type PVC tile (high pressure laminate).<br />
0435-JH0902-00-AR-SPC-0003 Page 5 of 5
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
1. SCOPE<br />
The purpose of this <strong>specification</strong> is to define the basic requirements for Earthwork<br />
related to implementation of proposed project. The following section deals with the<br />
work involved at any facility.<br />
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS<br />
2.1 Codes and standards<br />
All work shall conform to the latest requirements of Indian Standards as listed below :<br />
IS 2720 Soils Method of test for Parts 1 to 40<br />
IS 4988 Glossary of terms and classification of earth moving machinery Parts 1,2,3,<br />
4 and 5<br />
IS 10379<br />
IS 3764<br />
Code of Practice for Field Control of Soils<br />
Excavation Work – Code of Safety<br />
IS 6313 (Part II)<br />
Code of Practice for Anti-Termite Measures in Buildings.<br />
In the event of conflict between various codes and standards, the most stringent condition<br />
will apply. Unless specified otherwise the International System of metric units (S.I.) is to be<br />
used.<br />
2.2 Other Standards / <strong>specification</strong>s<br />
Specification for Concrete Work<br />
Specification for Masonry Work<br />
3. EARTHWORKS<br />
3.1 General<br />
This section of Specification covers the material and construction requirements for<br />
earthworks for Project areas. The work generally includes: Clearing, Grubbing-out,<br />
Stripping, Proof-rolling to determine soft spots, excavating, filling, <strong>com</strong>pacting and testing;<br />
all as described in this document. The extent of the work shall be as shown on the Project<br />
Drawings.<br />
3.2 Definition of Materials<br />
3.2.1 Common Excavation<br />
Common Excavation shall mean excavation in any material. All <strong>com</strong>mon excavated<br />
material shall be classified as suitable or unsuitable according to 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 below.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 Page 2 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
3.2.2 Suitable Material<br />
The fill material shall be granular, well graded, <strong>com</strong>pactable, and possess good drainage<br />
characteristics, and no swelling properties. It shall be free of vegetation, any organic<br />
matters and other impurities. In extraordinary circumstances expansive soil of free<br />
swell index, less than 50 % may be used, however approval shall be sought from the<br />
engineer in charge. The proposed fill material shall be tested to determine its<br />
suitability. However, filling material shall have Liquid limit between 20-35 and<br />
Plasticity index shall not be more than 12. All these testing cost shall be included<br />
in Contractors scope.<br />
3.2.3 Unsuitable Material<br />
The following type of material will be considered unsuitable for filling:<br />
1. Material with vegetation and shrubs<br />
2. Material in frozen condition or susceptible to <strong>com</strong>bustion<br />
3. Material resulting in leaching of embankment.<br />
4. Any material which classifies as CH, OH, Ol, LI as per IS: 1498<br />
5. Material with swelling index more than 50.<br />
3.3 General Site Preparation<br />
3.3.1 Clearing<br />
The Project area shall be cleared of all materials above or at the natural ground surface.<br />
Materials to be cleared include trees, bushes, vegetation, and obstructions. However, in<br />
certain specified areas like green belts, trees and bushes shall be retained and preserved.<br />
3.3.2 Grubbing<br />
The entire area within the limits of clearing shall have all stumps and roots removed.<br />
3.3.3 Stripping<br />
All turf and topsoil shall be stripped from the areas shown on the drawings or as directed<br />
by the Construction Manager to suit requirements at job-site. Turf and topsoil shall be<br />
stored for re-use in stockpiles separately from other excavated material. The location<br />
and finished levels of the stockpiles shall be as directed by the Construction Manager.<br />
3.3.4 Disposal<br />
Debris from clearing operations shall be burned or disposed off in a manner approved by<br />
Engineer -in - charge. Material too wet to burn shall be piled in windrows for later burning.<br />
Material from grubbing operations shall be removed to the designated spoils disposal<br />
areas.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 Page 3 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
3.3.5 Ground Markers<br />
A suitable number of permanent ground markers, shall be constructed before any<br />
setting-out work is <strong>com</strong>menced. Temporary Reference Monuments shall be constructed<br />
when and where required, as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.<br />
4. BULK EXCAVATION<br />
Excavations and cut and fill areas shall be kept free of water by pumping, temporary<br />
ditches or other approved means. The surface of cut and fill shall be sloped to prevent<br />
ponding. Excavation shall be performed to the lines and levels shown on the drawings.<br />
Slope of cuttings and embankments shall be as shown on the drawings.<br />
Excavation beyond the limits shown on the drawings shall be replaced with approved<br />
material, <strong>com</strong>pacted in accordance with this Specification.<br />
All excavated material shall be separately stockpiled for re-use or taken to the designated<br />
storage area, as directed by the Engineer in charge. Where cut areas have been reduced<br />
to level; any unsuitable material apparent at the surface shall be separately excavated<br />
and the resulting pockets filled with suitable material and <strong>com</strong>pacted in accordance<br />
with this Specification. In case of blasting of rock, Contractor shall prepare and submit a<br />
<strong>com</strong>prehensive procedure to the engineer in charge for approval. The blasting in rock<br />
shall only be carried out with the prior written approval of, and under the<br />
supervision of a certified Blasting Engineer. All local regulations shall be <strong>com</strong>plied with.<br />
Adequate safety precautions shall be carried out by means of Timber Shoring, Sheet<br />
Piling or similar protective measures as directed by the Engineer in charge, to ensure the<br />
safety of existing structures, pipelines and other installations.<br />
5. FILL<br />
5.1 Preparation for Fill<br />
Only approved suitable material from excavation or stockpiles shall be used, as described<br />
in Clause 3.2.2. The proposed methods to be used in fill operations for the <strong>com</strong>paction of<br />
material shall be approved prior to starting of work. Before filling <strong>com</strong>mences the area<br />
shall be proof rolled with at least four passes of a 10-ton vibratory roller.<br />
5.2 Placement of Fill<br />
The Contractor shall at least 7 days before <strong>com</strong>mencement of placement submit the<br />
following to the Engineer in charge:<br />
(i) The dry density of fill material against moisture content plot and values of<br />
maximum dry density and the optimum moisture content obtained in accordance<br />
with IS 2720 (Part 7) using the light <strong>com</strong>paction method.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 Page 4 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
(ii) Proposed method of placing the fill in maximum lifts of 200 mm to achieve the<br />
requirement of 95% maximum dry density as determined from the above<br />
information. The maximum thickness for placing fill material layer in large areas<br />
shall be maximum 300 mm and is determined by field tests and governed by type of<br />
<strong>com</strong>paction equipment.<br />
Once the above information is approved by the Engineer in charge, it shall form the basis<br />
for <strong>com</strong>paction. Fill shall be <strong>com</strong>pacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density.<br />
Places inaccessible to rollers shall be <strong>com</strong>pacted with mechanical or hand tampers. Plant<br />
areas within the primary roads and paved areas which do not contain equipment or<br />
buildings shall after <strong>com</strong>pletion of cut, fill, <strong>com</strong>paction, and final grading be proof rolled<br />
with at least four passes of a 10 ton vibratory roller. Field density test (sand replacement)<br />
at bottoms of excavations for individual foundations shall be carried out at the rate of 1 per<br />
foundation or every 10 sq. m of foundation on plan whichever is the greater. The final<br />
requirement of these tests to suit strata conditions shall be determined by the Field<br />
Engineer.<br />
In areas to be paved, the sub-grade will normally be graded to the under side of paving<br />
level, but in predominantly fill areas the filling operation may be temporarily halted, at an<br />
agreed lower level, until after the construction of equipment foundations.<br />
5.3 Broken Rock Fill<br />
Sound clean broken rock to a maximum size of 150 mm may be used as fill<br />
material subject to the approval of the Engineer in charge. All voids are to be filled with<br />
approved fine material. The rock material shall be spread in layers not exceeding<br />
400mm <strong>com</strong>pacted thickness and shall be <strong>com</strong>pacted by a minimum of 5 passes of a<br />
vibratory roller having a static weight 8-10 tonnes and until there are no signs of<br />
deformation<br />
6. TOLERANCES<br />
The grade shall be properly shaped to the required elevations and parallel to the required<br />
surface. The elevation of any point and the line of any edge or centre of the earthworks<br />
shall conform to that shown on the drawing within the tolerances of +/- 50 mm to final<br />
grade and slopes.<br />
7. EMBANKMENTS<br />
Embankments shall be formed of suitable material as described in Clause 3.2.2. The<br />
material shall be built up evenly over the full width of the embankment. The surface shall<br />
be maintained, at all times, with sufficient camber to enable surface water to drain<br />
off.<br />
8. EARTHWORK FOR FOUNDATIONS<br />
8.1 Excavation for Foundations<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 Page 5 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
Excavation shall be generally performed in accordance with Section 4. Excavated material<br />
shall not be deposited at the immediate edge of any excavation. The proximity and height<br />
of the excavated material shall be controlled so as to prevent danger of instability or<br />
damage to other structures and services. Excavated materials designated as<br />
surplus to requirements or material deemed unsuitable as fill shall be loaded and<br />
removed offsite to a properly sanctioned area. All excavations shall be kept free from<br />
water from whatever source so that the works shall be constructed in dry<br />
conditions.<br />
If any excavation pit gets filled by water due to rain seepage or for any other reason, the<br />
water shall be removed and the bottom of the excavation shall be cleared of all silt / slush<br />
by the Contractor at his own expense. Further the extra depth, if any, created during the<br />
clean up shall be made with PCC/sand<br />
The bottom of any excavation shall be kept dry and not used as a watercourse to drain the<br />
excavation to other areas. Shoring shall be in accordance with the Indian Standards.<br />
During excavations, safety measure shall be implemented in accordance with IS 3764.If<br />
in-situ material at specified foundation depth does not meet the bearing capacity<br />
requirements, it shall be removed to the depth as directed and filled with approved<br />
material and method<br />
8.2 Preparation<br />
The bottom of any excavation ready to receive the permanent works shall be mechanically<br />
<strong>com</strong>pacted using a vibrating plate or suitable sized roller and any soft spots or<br />
pockets of unsuitable material exposed, shall be excavated and replaced as<br />
approved by Engineer in charge. Precautions shall be taken to protect the bottom of<br />
the excavation, and should the bottom of the excavated material be<strong>com</strong>e<br />
unsuitable, either by exposure to weather conditions, water, or due to lapse of<br />
time between excavation and subsequent works, it shall be removed and replaced.<br />
8.3 Inspection<br />
When the bottom of any excavation is prepared, further work shall not proceed<br />
until the excavated bearing surface is approved.<br />
8.4 Protection<br />
Following <strong>com</strong>pletion of the excavation, and preparation of the bottom of the excavation to<br />
receive the permanent works, and once approval has been given, the blinding concrete,<br />
polythene membrane or such other protection as may be called for on the drawings shall<br />
be immediately applied.<br />
9. BACKFILLING<br />
Backfilling of all foundations/trenches shall not be carried out until the foundations or<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 Page 6 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTHWORK<br />
structures within the excavation have been approved and approval to <strong>com</strong>mence backfill<br />
has been given. The backfill material shall normally be the material excavated from the pit<br />
or trench. Boulders, lumps of concrete and other foreign matter shall be excluded. The<br />
backfill shall be placed and <strong>com</strong>pacted evenly around the structure in layers not exceeding<br />
200 mm and to 95% maximum dry density as determined under section 5.2 above.<br />
Mechanical <strong>com</strong>paction shall be used wherever possible and accordingly the thickness of<br />
layers adjusted. Care shall be taken during backfill operations to prevent damage to the<br />
permanent works. Compacting within 1 m of existing structures shall be performed by<br />
hand operated <strong>com</strong>pactors. In particular damage to waterproof membranes/cables etc.<br />
shall be repaired before backfilling is continued. Planking, strutting, trench sheets and<br />
other supports in excavations shall be removed as backfilling proceeds to maintain the<br />
stability of the side until backfill is <strong>com</strong>pleted. Temporary supports shall not be left in the<br />
ground. Areas of settlement or areas of fill that do not <strong>com</strong>ply with the required tolerances<br />
shall be investigated to determine the extent of non-conformance. Soft spots shall be<br />
excavated to remove all unsuitable material, which shall be replaced with suitable material<br />
and re-<strong>com</strong>pacted to the required density. High spots shall be scarified and excess<br />
material removed as necessary, the area shall then be re-<strong>com</strong>pacted to the required<br />
density.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 Page 7 of 7
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE WORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
1. SCOPE<br />
This Specification covers the general requirement for plain and reinforced concrete to<br />
be used as in-situ and pre-cast concrete. It covers requirements in regard to the<br />
quality, proportioning, batching, mixing, transporting, placing, curing, protecting,<br />
repairing, finishing and testing of concrete.<br />
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS<br />
2.1 Codes and Standards<br />
The Indian Standards and other referred standards (including all amendments<br />
and revisions) shall be considered as part of this Specification. In case any particular<br />
aspect of work is not covered specifically<br />
by these or any other relevant Indian Standard Specification, any other good<br />
engineering practice as may be specified by the <strong>com</strong>pany shall be followed:<br />
Following Indian standards including all amendments and revisions shall be<br />
considered as part of this <strong>specification</strong>.<br />
Indian Standards<br />
IS-SP23 Handbook on Concrete Mixes<br />
IS-269 Sand Cement Dry Pack Grout<br />
IS-280 Binding Wire<br />
IS-383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete<br />
IS-432 (Part 1) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel<br />
wire for concrete reinforcement: Mild steel and medium tensile steel<br />
bars<br />
IS-432 (Part 2) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel<br />
wire for concrete reinforcement: Hard-drawn steel wire<br />
IS-455 Portland slag cement<br />
IS-456 Code of practice for plan and reinforced concrete<br />
IS-516 Method of test for strength of concrete<br />
IS-650 Standard sand for testing of cement<br />
IS-1199 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete<br />
IS-1343 Code of practice for pre-stressed concrete<br />
IS-1489 (Part 1) Portland pozzolana cement: Flyash based<br />
IS-1489 (Part 2) Portland-pozzolana cement: Calcined clay based<br />
IS-1786 High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 2 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
IS-1791 Batch type concrete mixers<br />
IS-1834 Specification for hot applied sealing <strong>com</strong>pound for joint in concrete<br />
IS-1838 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joints in concrete<br />
pavements and structures (non extruding and resilient type) : Part 1 & 2<br />
IS-2386 (Part 1) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Particle size and shape<br />
IS-2386(Part 2) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Estimation of<br />
deleterious materials and organic impurities<br />
IS-2386 (Part 3) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Specific gravity, density,<br />
voids, absorption and bulking<br />
IS-2386 (Part 4) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Mechanical properties<br />
IS-2386 (Part 5) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Soundness<br />
IS-2386 (Part 6) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Measuring mortar making<br />
properties of fine aggregates<br />
IS-2386 (Part 7) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Alkali aggregate reactivity<br />
IS-2386 (Part 8) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete: Petrographic examination<br />
IS-2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement<br />
IS 2645 Specification for integral cement water proofing <strong>com</strong>pounds<br />
IS 3025 Method of sampling and testing water<br />
IS-3085 Method of test for permeability of cement mortar and concrete<br />
IS-3096 Safety Code for scaffolds and ladders<br />
IS-3370 (Part 1) Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids:<br />
General requirements<br />
IS-3370 (Part 2) Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids:<br />
Reinforced concrete structures<br />
IS-3370 (Part 3) Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids:<br />
Prestressed concrete structures<br />
IS-3370 (Part 4) Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids:<br />
Design tables<br />
IS 3812 Specification for fly ash for use as pozzolana and admixture<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 3 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
IS-4082 Re<strong>com</strong>mendation on staking and storage of construction materials at site<br />
IS-4926 : Ready mixed concrete (RMC)<br />
IS-5525: Re<strong>com</strong>mendations for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced concrete works<br />
IS-5816: Method of test for splitting tensile strength of concrete cylinders<br />
IS-6461 (Part 2) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Materials<br />
IS-64661 (Part 3) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Concrete<br />
reinforcement<br />
IS-6461 (Part 4) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Types of concrete<br />
IS-6461 (Part 5) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete. Formwork for concrete<br />
IS-6461 (Part 6) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Equipment, tools and<br />
plant<br />
IS-6461 (Part 7) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Mixing, laying,<br />
<strong>com</strong>paction, curing and other construction aspects<br />
IS-6461 (Part 8) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Properties of concrete<br />
IS-6461 (Part 9) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Structural aspects<br />
IS-6461 (Part 10) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Tests and testing<br />
apparatus<br />
IS-6461 (Part 11) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Pre-stressed concrete<br />
IS-6461 (Part 12) Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete: Miscellaneous<br />
IS-7861 (Part 1) Code of practice for extreme weather concreting. Re<strong>com</strong>mended<br />
practice for hot weather concreting<br />
IS-7861(Part 2) Code of practice for extreme weather concreting: Re<strong>com</strong>mended<br />
practice for cold weather concreting<br />
IS-8041 Rapid hardening Portland cement<br />
IS-8112 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement<br />
IS 8142 Method of test for determining setting time of concrete by penetration<br />
resistance<br />
IS-9013 Method of making, curing and determining <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of<br />
accelerated cured concrete test specimens<br />
IS-9103 Admixtures for concrete<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 4 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
IS-9417 Re<strong>com</strong>mendation for welding cold worked bars for reinforced concrete<br />
construction<br />
IS-10262<br />
Re<strong>com</strong>mended guidelines for concrete mix design<br />
IS-10790 (Part 1) Methods of sampling of steel for prestressed and reinforced concrete:<br />
Prestressed steel<br />
IS-10790 (Part 2) Methods of sampling of steel for prestressed and reinforced concrete:<br />
Reinforcing steel<br />
IS-11433 One Part Grade Polysulphide based joint sealant Part I & II IS-12269<br />
53 grade ordinary Portland cement<br />
IS-12330 Sulphate resisting cement<br />
IS-13311<br />
velocity<br />
Non-destructive testing of concrete methods of test: Ultrasonic pulse<br />
IS 4031 Part 1 to 15 method of physical tests for hydraulic cement<br />
IS 4032 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement<br />
2.2 Other Standards / <strong>specification</strong>s<br />
Specification for Earthwork<br />
Specification for Structural Steel Work<br />
3. CONCRETE GRADES<br />
Concrete shall be designated by grades as below.<br />
Grades of Concrete<br />
Grade<br />
M10 10<br />
M15 15<br />
M20 20<br />
M25 25<br />
M30 30<br />
M35 35<br />
M40 40<br />
Specified Characteristic Compressive Strength At 28 Day<br />
N/mm2<br />
In the designation of concrete mix, the letter 'M' refers to the mix and the<br />
number to the specified characteristic <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of 15 cm cube at 28 days<br />
expressed in N/mm2.<br />
4. MATERIAL<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 5 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
4.1 Cements<br />
4.1.1 General<br />
Cement delivered hot from the factory shall not be used until its temperature is below<br />
350C.<br />
4.1.2 Cement types<br />
The following cement types of locally available best quality shall be used :<br />
i. Grade 43 OPC to IS 8112.<br />
ii. Grade 53 OPC to IS 12269.<br />
iii. Factory blended Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) contain fly ash grade 1 to IS<br />
3812.<br />
iv. Rapid hardening Portland cement to IS 8041.<br />
v. Sulphate resisting cement to IS 12330.<br />
vi. Cement with pulverized fuel ash.<br />
4.1.3 Tests and Analysis<br />
Manufacturer’s certificates shall be provided confirming that cement delivered to the site<br />
has been tested and found to <strong>com</strong>ply with the requirements of the appropriate<br />
Standard. If subsequent tests on any consignment of cement show it not to<br />
<strong>com</strong>ply with Specification requirements, then the whole consignment shall be<br />
removed immediately from the site notwithstanding the manufacturer’s certificate<br />
results.<br />
Access to the cement store shall be provided during working hours for the<br />
purpose of sampling the cement for further testing.<br />
4.1.4 Cement Store<br />
Cement shall be kept at all times in covered storage in an approved manner.<br />
No cement shall be kept on the site longer than three months before use. Any cement,<br />
which is stored on site in excess of 90 days, shall be tested in accordance with<br />
relevant Indian Standard prior to use. Sufficient cement for one week’s consumption<br />
shall be available at all times. Cement shall be used in the sequence in which it is<br />
delivered.<br />
The cement store for bagged cement shall be a weatherproof building or shed,<br />
ventilated, lit and free of dampness. The size will be sufficient to hold enough cement<br />
for continuous execution of the works. Bags for cement shall be lined in polythene or<br />
other damp-proof material. If cement in bulk is to be used, prior approval must be<br />
obtained.<br />
4.2 Aggregates<br />
4.2.1 General<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 6 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
All aggregates shall be from approved sources and shall <strong>com</strong>ply with IS 383. Fine and<br />
coarse aggregates shall be considered separate ingredients. Both shall meet the<br />
grading requirements of IS 383.<br />
Aggregates shall be clean, hard, durable, chemically inert and impermeable.They<br />
shall be free from adherent coatings, laminated particles or admixtures of materials<br />
likely to be deleterious to the concrete.<br />
Dune and beach sand shall not be used for fine aggregate.<br />
In general, coarse aggregate shall be max. 20 mm. However, this may be increased to<br />
a maximum of 40mm for certain structures/foundations, as shown on the drawings<br />
or directed by the Construction Manager in the field.<br />
4.2.2 Sampling and Testing<br />
Sampling and testing of aggregates shall be carried out in accordance with IS<br />
2386. If adequate laboratory facilities do not exist on site, samples must be sent<br />
to a convenient approved testing laboratory. Samples of fine and coarse aggregate<br />
shall be sent in suitable airtight containers.<br />
Chlorides and other contents in the coarse aggregates and fine aggregates shall be<br />
limited as follows:<br />
Course Aggregates<br />
Chlorides as CL 0.03% Max. Sulphates as SO3 0.40% Max. Fine Aggregates<br />
Chlorides as CL 0.06% Max.<br />
Sulphates as SO3 0.40% Max.<br />
Aggregates shall be tested in accordance with IS 2386 or be obtained from a supplier<br />
whose aggregates have previously been proven to meet these requirements.<br />
Compliance certificates shall be submitted for approval.<br />
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in sand when<br />
tested accordance to IS 2386, shall not be more than 5 % by mass in natural sand, or<br />
crush gravel sand or crushed stone sand. For organic impurities, the colour of liquid<br />
shall be lighter than indicated by standard solution specified in IS 2386.<br />
Any aggregates that do not meet the requirements of the relevant standards<br />
shall not be used in the works.<br />
Tests shall be carried out from each source as follows:<br />
4.2.3 Acceptance<br />
The site engineer has the right to reject any materials that do not meet the<br />
requirements of this <strong>specification</strong>.<br />
4.2.4 Storage<br />
Sufficient quantities of each type of aggregate shall be maintained on site at all times to<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 7 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
ensure continuity of work. Each type and grading of aggregate shall be stored<br />
separately in such a manner that mixing of the various size particles shall not<br />
occur. The floors of the storage areas at the batching plants shall be of concrete or<br />
other approved material, and shall be sloped sufficiently to ensure adequate<br />
drainage of surplus water.<br />
A random check for dust contamination in the stock pile shall be carried prior to loading<br />
the batch plant bins with aggregates. As a minimum, aggregate storage shall satisfy the<br />
requirements of IS 4082.<br />
4.3 Water<br />
Water used for the following shall be free of dirt, chemicals organic materials<br />
and litter in suspension conforming to IS 456 clause 4.3 and tested to IS 3025:<br />
i. Mixing concrete,<br />
ii. Mixing cement/sand mortar,<br />
iii. Mixing grouts,<br />
iv. Ice production,<br />
v. Rinsing aggregates,<br />
vi. Cooling aggregates,<br />
vii. Curing concrete.<br />
4.4 Admixtures<br />
4.4.1 General<br />
Admixtures conforming to IS 9103 may be used subject to approval. In no<br />
circumstances shall admixtures containing chlorides or other corrosive agents be<br />
allowed. No air entraining agents shall be used without prior trials and approval. Sample<br />
of packed admixtures shall be obtained as per IS 3535. The Contractor shall prove<br />
<strong>com</strong>patibility with the type of cement used.<br />
4.4.2 Super Plasticizers<br />
In hot weather, after trials and approval, a naphthalene sulphate retarding super<br />
plasticizer can be used to increase workability of the concrete and retard the initial<br />
set.The concrete mix with plasticizer shall <strong>com</strong>ply with IS 1199 and IS 8142<br />
respectively. The plasticizer shall be of approved brands. Confirmation shall be<br />
obtained that the super plasticizer is <strong>com</strong>patible with any Pozzolana, which is used.<br />
5. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING<br />
The mix proportion shall be selected to ensure adequate workability when<br />
handling and placing. On hardening, concrete shall have the required strength,<br />
durability and surface finish. The determination of the proportions of cement aggregates<br />
and water to attain the required strength shall be either:<br />
i. By determining the concrete mix; such concrete shall be called “Design Mix<br />
Concrete”, or<br />
ii By adopting nominal concrete mix; such concrete shall be called “Nominal Mix<br />
Concrete”. Concrete of grade M20 and above shall be ‘Design Mix Concrete’ unless<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 8 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
otherwise specified.<br />
In either case, the Contractor shall be solely responsible to ensure that the concrete<br />
has all the essential properties, i.e. characteristic <strong>com</strong>pressive strength, and any<br />
additional properties that may be specified.<br />
5.1 Design Mix Concrete<br />
At least two weeks before <strong>com</strong>mencement of concreting of a particular grade in<br />
permanent works, the Contractor shall have obtained the Engineer’s approval of the<br />
Design Mix for that particular grade.<br />
5.1.1 Trial Mixes<br />
Structural Concrete<br />
The mix(s) shall be designed mixes in accordance with IS SP23 Handbook on<br />
Concrete Mixes and IS:10262 and as specified in this document. The relative<br />
proportions of the fine and coarse aggregates, the workability and strengths of the<br />
mixes shall be determined by production equipment trial mixes. The trial mixes shall be<br />
carried out in order to produce a concrete which can be properly placed and<br />
<strong>com</strong>pacted, so that a dense impermeable concrete can be produced which shall<br />
adequately resist the ingress of damaging salts. If an admixture is proposed it shall<br />
be used in the trial mixes. The required workability for large foundations will differ from<br />
that for tall thin sections of structural concrete cast above ground and the trial mixes<br />
shall allow for both cases.<br />
When the proposed workability and proportion of the aggregates and admixture (if any)<br />
for each of the grades of concrete has been established, test concrete shall be<br />
produced for approval. The following tests shall be carried out for each grade of<br />
concrete:<br />
Four separate test mixes shall be prepared and six test cubes shall be made from each<br />
test mix for each grade of concrete. The test cubes shall be made and cured in<br />
accordance with IS 516.<br />
Testing shall be made in threes or multiples of threes. Only 28-day result shall be<br />
considered and the mean strength and standard deviation established for each grade.<br />
The test mixes shall be accepted provided that:<br />
a) The mix proportions and workability are in accordance with this Specification.<br />
b) The standard deviation for all the different grades shall be worked out as per clause<br />
2.1 of IS: 10262-1982.<br />
c) The acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with clause 16 of IS 456.<br />
Maximum Water Cement Ratio in Cement Concrete to Ensure Durability under<br />
specified Exposure.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 9 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE<br />
WORK<br />
Condition of Exposure Plain Concrete Reinforced<br />
Concrete<br />
Mild- For Example Completely Protected 0.6 0.55<br />
− Against weather, or aggressive conditions, except for a brief period of exposure to<br />
normal condition during construction<br />
Moderate- For Example Sheltered from 0.6 0.50<br />
− Heavy and wind driven rain and against freezing, whilst saturated with water, buried<br />
concrete in soil and concrete<br />
− Continuously under water<br />
Severe- For Example Exposed to Sea 0.5 0.45<br />
− Water, alternate wetting and drying and to freezing while wet, subject to heavy<br />
condensate or corrosive fumes<br />
Based on the results of the preliminary test, the contractor shall select a final design mix<br />
for the trial mixes and shall furnish the same to the Engineer. The contractor<br />
shall demonstrate that the proposed design mix will produce the grade and<br />
quality of concrete required with adequate workability<br />
A fresh mix design shall be arrived at each time there is a change in the quality or<br />
source of materials Water, alternate wetting and drying and to freezing while wet,<br />
subject to heavy condensation or corrosive fumes. Based on the results of the<br />
preliminary tests, the Contractor shall select a final design mix from the trial mixes and<br />
shall furnish the same to the Engineer. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the<br />
proposed design mix will produce the grade and quality of concrete required with<br />
adequate workability. A fresh mix design shall be arrived at each time there is a change<br />
in the quality or source of materials. Minimum Cement Content (Ref IS 456, Table 5)<br />
Plain Concrete<br />
Exposure<br />
Min. Grade of<br />
Concrete<br />
Min. Cement Content<br />
(kg/m3)<br />
Mild - 220<br />
Moderate M15 240<br />
Severe M20 250<br />
Very<br />
Severe M20 260<br />
Extreme M25 280<br />
Reinforced Concrete<br />
Exposure<br />
Min. Grade of<br />
Concrete<br />
Min. Cement Content<br />
(kg/m3)<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 10 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
Mild M20 300<br />
Moderate M25 300<br />
Severe M30 320<br />
Very<br />
Severe M35 340<br />
Extreme M40 360<br />
5.1.2 Nominal Mix Concrete<br />
No mix design or preliminary tests are necessary for Nominal Mix Concrete.<br />
Nominal Mix Concrete shall be restricted to works of minor nature in which<br />
the strength of concrete is not critical as decided by the Engineer. The limit<br />
of chloride content of concrete shall be as follows:<br />
Type or Use of Concrete<br />
1. Concrete containing metal<br />
and steam cured at elevated<br />
temperature and prestressed<br />
CONCRETE.<br />
Max. Total Acid<br />
Soluble chloride content<br />
expressed as kg/m 3 of concrete<br />
0.4<br />
2. Reinforced or plain concrete<br />
containing<br />
embedded metal<br />
0.6<br />
3. Concrete not containing<br />
embedded metal<br />
3.0<br />
5.2 Batching<br />
In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregate shall be<br />
determined by weight. In case uniformity of aggregate has been established<br />
over a period of time, and where weigh batching is not practicable, the<br />
quantity of fine and coarse aggregate (not cement) may be determined<br />
by volume if permitted by the Engineer. If fine aggregate is moist and<br />
volume batching is adopted, allowance shall be made for bulking in<br />
accordance with IS 2386 (Part III). All measuring devices shall be accurate to<br />
+ 3% and shall be regularly checked.<br />
The water-cement ratio shall be maintained constant at its correct value. To<br />
this end, determination of moisture content in both fine and coarse aggregate<br />
shall be made by the Contractor at no extra cost. The frequency of tests shall<br />
be determined by the Engineer according to weather conditions.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 11 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
5.3 Mixing<br />
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The mixer shall <strong>com</strong>ply with<br />
IS 1791. The mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of<br />
the materials and the mass is uniform in color and consistency. If there<br />
is segregation after unloading from the mixer, the concrete shall be<br />
remixed. For guidance, the mixing time may be 1-1/2 to 2 minutes.<br />
Workability of the concrete shall be controlled by direct measurement of water<br />
content. Workability shall be checked at frequent intervals (See IS 1199).<br />
6. FORMWORK<br />
6.1 General<br />
The design and construction of the formwork shall be the responsibility<br />
of the Contractor. However, if instructed by the Engineer, the drawings<br />
and calculations for the design of the formwork shall be submitted to<br />
the Engineer for approval. Design of formwork shall take account of<br />
safety and surface finish. The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to<br />
prevent loss of grout or mortar from the fresh concrete. Props used for<br />
support shall be of steel tubes.<br />
Formwork shall be designed to withstand the worst <strong>com</strong>bination of self<br />
weight, reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight, concrete pressure,<br />
construction and wind loads together with dynamic effect caused by placing,<br />
vibrating and <strong>com</strong>pacting the concrete. Forms shall be designed and<br />
constructed to maintain rigidity throughout the placing, ramming, vibration<br />
and setting of the concrete to the required shape, position and level<br />
and specified class of finish within the allowable tolerances. All joints<br />
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout. If movement or<br />
deflection of the formwork or loss of grout occurs, the damaged concrete<br />
supported by such formwork shall be removed and the concrete re-cast so<br />
that the required finish is obtained. Formwork and its supports should be<br />
designed to withstand the worst <strong>com</strong>binations of self-weight, reinforcement<br />
and wet concrete weights, concrete pressure, construction and wind loads.<br />
Due regard shall be taken to the type of mix when considering the design<br />
pressure on the formwork. The formwork shall be pre-cambered by an<br />
amount equal to the expected maximum deflection shall be as shown on the<br />
drawings.<br />
If timber forms are used they shall be of sound, well-seasoned timber free<br />
from loose knots. The forms shall be faced to give the specified class of<br />
finish for the structures. The formed surfaces of exposed concrete shall<br />
be smooth, true and free from all irregularities.<br />
For below ground concrete except against existing structures, rough<br />
formwork, steel pans etc., provided all joints prevent the loss of grout.<br />
The formwork shall be capable of being dismantled and removed from the<br />
cast concrete without shock, disturbance or damage. The arrangement shall<br />
be such that the soffit forms properly supported on props, can be retained in<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 12 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
position for such period as may be required by maturing conditions or<br />
<strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
6.2 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms<br />
All rubbish shall be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete<br />
is placed. The faces of the forms in contact with the concrete shall be<br />
clean and treated with a suitable release agent, where applicable.<br />
Release agent shall be applied so as to provide a thin uniform coating to the<br />
forms without contaminating the reinforcement.<br />
6.3 Striking of Form work<br />
In normal circumstances where Ordinary Portland Cement is used, forms<br />
shall generally be removed after the expiry of the following periods:<br />
a) Walls, Columns and vertical<br />
faces of all structural members<br />
24 to 48 hours as may be<br />
decided by the Engineer<br />
b) Slabs (Props left Under) 3 Days<br />
c) Beam Soffits (Props left Under) 7 Days<br />
d)<br />
Removal of Props under Slabs:<br />
1) Spanning upto 4.5m<br />
2) Spanning over 4.5m<br />
e) Removal of Props under Beams<br />
and Arches:<br />
1) Spanning upto 6.0m<br />
2) Spanning over 6.0m<br />
7 Days<br />
14 Days<br />
14 Days<br />
21 Days<br />
For other cements, the stripping time re<strong>com</strong>mended for Ordinary<br />
Portland Cement shall be suitably modified. The number, size and position<br />
of props left under shall be such as to be able to safely carry the dead load of<br />
the slab, beam or arch, together with any live load likely to occur during curing<br />
or further construction.<br />
Sleeves for through bolts shall not be provided in formwork for liquid<br />
retaining structures as they are potential hazard for leakage. Special<br />
devices shall be fabricated using two ordinary M20 nuts separated by two<br />
numbers 10 mm rounds welded to opposite flat side of the nuts. The faces of<br />
the nuts will have a <strong>com</strong>pressible rubber bushing 20 mm thick. The overall<br />
dimension of the assembly shall be 50 mm less than the designed thickness<br />
of the concrete. Adjusting bolt shall pass through formwork and will lock into<br />
the nuts. While these bolts are tightened, the formwork will travel inwards.<br />
Once the desired dimension is achieved, concrete will be poured. During<br />
deshuttering, the bolts will be removed to loosen the shuttering plates. The<br />
depression will be sealed using suitable concrete sealant.<br />
6.4 Surface Finishes from Formwork<br />
Generally formwork shall be specified as either wrought or unwrought<br />
depending on the<br />
required surface finish.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 13 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
6.4.1 Unwrought Formwork<br />
Unwrought Formwork shall consist of sawn boards, brick or concrete<br />
block work, sheet metal or other suitable material to give adequate support<br />
to the concrete.<br />
Appearance is not of primary importance for this class of formwork.<br />
Surfaces to which plaster, granolithic or other finish is to be applied shall be<br />
roughened while the concrete is still green.<br />
6.4.2 Wrought Formwork<br />
Wrought formwork shall be provided for concrete surfaces that are required to<br />
be finished smooth. Wrought formwork shall be lined with metal or plywood<br />
having smooth surfaces and edges. Formwork shall be furnished in largest<br />
practicable sizes to minimize the number of joints. Care shall be taken that<br />
there are no irregularities or roughness between successive sections of<br />
shuttering such that finished surfaces shall be free of board or shutter marks.<br />
Upon removal of formwork, surfaces of finished concrete shall be rubbed<br />
down with carborundum stone where necessary to obtain a uniform and<br />
smooth appearance.<br />
The finish shall be such as to require no filling of surface pitting, butt fins,<br />
surface discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied by approved<br />
methods. Rendering of defective concrete as a means of making good will not<br />
be permitted except that, in case of<br />
minor porosity on the surface, approval may be given for the surface to be<br />
treated by rubbing down with a cement mortar of the same fine<br />
aggregate/cement ratio as the concrete. The treatment shall occur<br />
immediately after removing the formwork. Both cement and aggregate shall<br />
be from the same source as the concrete materials.<br />
Concrete containing honey<strong>com</strong>bing, major air holes or similar defects shall be<br />
cut out and replaced as directed. No repair shall be executed without<br />
approval.<br />
6.4.3 Ties<br />
Where it is required to use internal ties and spacers, their type, spacing and<br />
use shall be approved. No part of any such tie or spacer remaining<br />
permanently embedded in the concrete shall be nearer than the specified<br />
cover to the finished surface of the concrete. Wire ties projecting through the<br />
concrete face shall not be permitted.<br />
6.5 Permanent Formwork<br />
Permanent formwork for elevated concrete floors in steel structures<br />
shall be profiled steel sheet. The sheet shall be of sufficient thickness to<br />
sustain all construction loads plus the weight of fresh concrete between<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 14 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
supporting beams without excessive deflection. The underside of the sheet<br />
shall be coated with an approved corrosive resistant paint. The material shall<br />
conform to IS 513. The deflection shall be limited to span / 150. The sheet<br />
shall be fixed on the supporting beams at every alternate valley by 10 mm dia<br />
fusion welding with 22 mm dia x 2.5 mm thick reinforcing washer.<br />
Minimum 100 mm overlap shall be provided. The deck sheet end resting<br />
on wall shall have a seating of 150 mm minimum. Side laps shall be secured<br />
with tack welding to ensure that the slurry does not leak down. End laps shall<br />
always be on the supporting walls or on supporting beams. The overhang<br />
of the deck sheet shall be limited to 300 mm maximum. Temporary<br />
supports, where ever advised by the construction manager, shall be firm, and<br />
at the same level as the permanent supports and shall be in place till the<br />
concrete attains its full strength. While removing the temporary supports, care<br />
shall be taken that the slab is not disturbed.<br />
6.6 Formwork for Vibrated Concrete<br />
If external vibrators are to be used for <strong>com</strong>pacting the concrete, the<br />
type of vibrator, design of the formwork and the method of fixing the<br />
vibrators shall all be approved.<br />
6.7 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms<br />
Before concreting is <strong>com</strong>mencing the forms and previously cast concrete<br />
shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from all sawdust, tie wire, shavings,<br />
dust, dirt and other debris. Temporary openings shall be provided where<br />
necessary to drain away water and remove rubbish.<br />
Release agents shall be applied and be <strong>com</strong>patible with the class of finish.<br />
Care shall be taken not to contaminate the reinforcement.<br />
7. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS<br />
7.1 General<br />
The number of construction joints shall be kept to the minimum necessary for<br />
the execution of the work. Their location shall be carefully considered and<br />
approved by Engineer before concrete is placed. Construction joints shall<br />
normally be at right angles to the general direction of the member. The<br />
concrete at the joint shall be bonded with that subsequently placed<br />
against it, without provision for relative movement between the two. When<br />
the work has to be resumed on surface, which has hardened, such surface<br />
shall be roughened. It shall then be swept clean and thoroughly wetted.<br />
For vertical joint neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface before it<br />
is dry. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar<br />
about 10 to 15 mm thick <strong>com</strong>posed of cement and sand in the same ratio as<br />
the cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry or mortar<br />
shall be freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing of the concrete.<br />
Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by<br />
scrubbing the wet surface with wire brushes, care being taken to avoid<br />
dislodgement of particles of aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 15 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
wetted and all free water removed. The surface shall then be coated with neat<br />
cement slurry. On this surface, a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm in<br />
the thickness shall first be placed and shall be rammed against old work,<br />
particular attention being paid to corners and close spots; work thereafter<br />
shall proceed in the normal way. The number, size and positions of props left<br />
under shall be able to carry safely the dead load of the slab, beam or arch<br />
together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further<br />
construction. Cambers and chamfers, wherever shown in drawing shall be<br />
provided accordingly.<br />
7.2 Expansion Joints<br />
Expansion joints and joints around equipment in concrete paving shall be as<br />
detailed in the drawing and shall be formed with an approved bitumen<br />
impregnated fibreboard. The upper 20 mm shall be sealed with an approved<br />
two part, Polysulphide, oil resistant sealant (H.C. grade)<br />
applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
The joint filler shall be fixed firmly to the first placed concrete before the<br />
adjoining concrete is placed. The concrete must be thoroughly <strong>com</strong>pacted on<br />
both sides of the joint. The location of expansion joints shall be shown on the<br />
engineering drawings.<br />
7.3 Contraction Joints<br />
Contraction joints (either <strong>com</strong>plete or partial) shall be located on the drawings<br />
and formed with a building paper membrane interface, or equivalent<br />
separating membrane and the upper 25 mm depth sealed. The steel<br />
reinforcement shall be continuous through partial contraction joints. The<br />
use of contraction joints should be kept to a minimum <strong>com</strong>patible with<br />
freedom from cracking.<br />
7.4 Joint Fillers<br />
Joint fillers and sealing <strong>com</strong>pounds shall <strong>com</strong>ply to IS 1834, IS 1838 and IS<br />
11433.<br />
8. REINFORCEMENT<br />
Reinforcement shall <strong>com</strong>ply with IS 1786 or IS 432. Reinforcement shall be<br />
cut and bent in accordance with approved bar bending schedules.<br />
8.1 Cutting and Bending<br />
Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with IS 2502. It is<br />
essential that reinforcement shall not be subjected to mechanical damage<br />
prior to embedment. In general, reinforcement shall be bent cold.<br />
Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature.<br />
It is permissible to bend mild steel reinforcement projecting from concrete<br />
provided that care is taken to ensure that radius of bend is not less than that<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 16 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
specified in IS 2502. Grade Fe.415 bars shall not be re- bent or straightened<br />
without the Engineer's approval.<br />
8.2 Fixing<br />
Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement outside the specified<br />
limits. Actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required nominal cover<br />
minus 5 mm or two third the nominal cover whichever is more. In slabs, the<br />
actual concrete cover shall be not more than the required nominal cover plus.<br />
1 5 mm on bars up to and including 12 mm size<br />
2 10 mm on bars over 12 mm and up to 25 mm<br />
3 15 mm on bars over 25 mm<br />
Spacers and chairs shall be used to maintain the specified nominal<br />
cover to the steel reinforcement.<br />
Spacers or chairs shall be placed at a maximum spacing of 1 meter.<br />
Wherever reinforcing bars are intended to be in contact, they shall be<br />
securely bound together with 18 gauge annealed soft iron wire.<br />
The mix used for spacer blocks made from cement, sand and fine<br />
aggregates shall<br />
be <strong>com</strong>parable in strength, durability and appearance to the surrounding<br />
concrete.<br />
The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting,<br />
particular attention being directed to ensure that the nominal cover is<br />
maintained within the limits, given, especially in the case of cantilever<br />
sections.<br />
8.3 Surface Conditions<br />
Concrete shall not be placed around reinforcement unless the reinforcement<br />
is free from mud, oil, paint, loose rust, grease or any other substance which<br />
can be shown to adversely effect the steel or concrete chemically or reduce<br />
the bond.<br />
8.4 Laps and Joints<br />
Laps and joints shall be made only by the methods specified and at the<br />
positions shown on the drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.<br />
8.5 Welding<br />
Welding on site shall be avoided if possible, but may be permitted<br />
where suitable safeguards and techniques are employed. Generally,<br />
however, all welding shall be carried out in a workshop. The<br />
<strong>com</strong>petence of the welder shall be demonstrated prior to and<br />
periodically during welding operations. Welding of mild steel bars shall<br />
be carried out in accordance with IS 2751. Welding of high strength<br />
deformed bars shall be in accordance with IS 9417. The carbon content of<br />
high yield strength deformed bars conforming to IS 1786 shall not be more<br />
than 0.25%. If carbon content exceeds the limits specified herein, specifically<br />
written down welding and testing procedure shall be followed.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 17 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
8.6 Tolerances on Placing<br />
Reinforcement shall be placed within the following tolerances:<br />
1. For effective depth 200 mm or less + 10 mm<br />
2. For effective depth more than 200 mm + 15 mm.<br />
8.7 Tying of Reinforcement<br />
Bars crossing each other, where required shall be secured by binding wire<br />
(annealed) conforming to IS:280. Every <strong>com</strong>pression bar will be tied at least<br />
in two perpendicular directions.<br />
9. TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTING AND CURING OF<br />
CONCRETE<br />
9.1 Transporting<br />
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as<br />
possible by methods that will prevent the segregation, loss of any ingredients<br />
or ingress of foreign matter or water and will maintain the required workability.<br />
The concrete shall be deposited as close as possible to its final<br />
position to avoid handling or moving the concrete horizontally by vibrating.<br />
The addition of water at point of discharge is prohibited.<br />
9.2 Placing and Compacting Concrete<br />
All placing and <strong>com</strong>pacting shall be carried out under suitable supervision and<br />
as soon after mixing as is practicable.<br />
Placing of concrete shall <strong>com</strong>mence only after embedment in the concrete is<br />
securely fixed in position.<br />
Care shall be taken to avoid displacing reinforcement and damage to the<br />
faces of formwork, particularly when the concrete is allowed to fall freely<br />
through the depth of lift. The concrete shall not be dropped from a height of<br />
over 1.5 meter unless it is dropped by a tremie or chute.<br />
Immediately before concrete placement, surfaces of previously placed<br />
concrete, which shall be in contact with the concrete to be placed, shall be<br />
covered with a bonding mortar grout. The bonding medium shall have the<br />
same cement-sand content as the concrete to be placed on it. Bonding<br />
planes shall generally be horizontal.<br />
No concrete shall be placed in flowing water. Under water, concrete shall be<br />
placed in position by tremies or by pipeline from the mixer and never allowed<br />
to fall freely through the water.<br />
Concrete shall be placed in successive horizontal layers in thicknesses not<br />
exceeding 500 mm. Concrete shall be thoroughly <strong>com</strong>pacted by vibration<br />
or other means during placing and worked around the reinforcement,<br />
embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a solid void free<br />
mass having the required surface finish. When vibrators are used, vibration<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 18 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete<br />
until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner that does not<br />
promote segregation. Over vibration shall be avoided to minimize the<br />
risk of forming a weak surface layer.<br />
When internal or immersion type vibrators are used they shall have frequency<br />
of 7000 RPM. They shall be inserted in a vertical position at an interval of<br />
about 600 mm. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete inside the<br />
formwork. When external vibration is used, the design of formwork and<br />
disposition of vibration shall be such as to ensure efficient <strong>com</strong>paction and to<br />
avoid surface blemishes.<br />
The Contractor shall keep a <strong>com</strong>plete record of the work of concreting<br />
showing the time and date of placing. This record shall be available for<br />
inspection at any time by the Engineer. Structural concreting against open<br />
excavation will not be permitted.<br />
9.3 Curing<br />
Curing is the process of preventing the loss of moisture from the concrete<br />
while maintaining a satisfactory temperature. The prevention of moisture<br />
loss from the concrete is particularly important if the water/cement<br />
ratio is low.<br />
Curing and protection shall start immediately after the <strong>com</strong>paction of the<br />
concrete to prevent it from:<br />
1 Prematurely drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind,<br />
2 Leaching out by rain and flowing water.<br />
Where members are of considerable bulk or length, the cement content<br />
of the concrete is high, the surface finish is critical; the method of curing<br />
shall be specified in detail.<br />
Surfaces shall normally be cured for at least for 7 days. The most<br />
<strong>com</strong>mon methods of curing are: Covering the surface with a damp<br />
absorbent material like sacking and keeping the material constantly wet.<br />
By ponding top surface with water (sea water not permitted) for slabs<br />
and the like. By continuous or frequent applications of water to the surface,<br />
avoiding alternate wetting and drying and the application of cold water to<br />
warm concrete surfaces.<br />
Spraying the surface with an efficient curing membrane. The curing<br />
<strong>com</strong>pound shall conform to relevant Indian Standards and shall be applied in<br />
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to provide a water loss not<br />
greater than 0.55 kg/ m2 in 72 hours. Curing <strong>com</strong>pound shall be used where<br />
conventional curing by water cannot be ac<strong>com</strong>plished, following approval<br />
of construction manager.<br />
10. PROTECTIVE COATINGS<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 19 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
The protective coating for underground and over ground structures will be<br />
decided on case-to-case basis based on duty conditions and the importance<br />
of the structure and the same shall be described in detail in the project<br />
specific <strong>specification</strong> and drawings. In general, method ‘A’ or ‘B’ shall be<br />
followed<br />
METHOD A<br />
concrete shall be cast or placed onto polythene sheeting 1000 gauge<br />
laid over the concrete blinding.<br />
Overlap shall be 150 mm and the sheeting shall extend 150 mm<br />
beyond the edge of all foundations. Approved membranes are<br />
‘Visqueen’ by I.C.I. Plastics or ‘Duraplane’ by British Cellophane Ltd. Or<br />
approved equal.<br />
Surfaces below ground level shall be coated with two coats of a proprietary<br />
<strong>com</strong>bined curing <strong>com</strong>pound and damp proof membrane (DPM).<br />
A square scrape master sample shall be taken to determine the weight of<br />
specified thickness of coating from a 300 mm x 300 mm patch. The weight<br />
can then be <strong>com</strong>pared with test samples. Concrete shall also be wrapped in<br />
1000 gauge polythene sheeting.<br />
Backfill material shall be select fill material so as to avoid damage to<br />
protective coatings. Exposed external concrete surfaces for a depth of<br />
150 mm below ground level and 300 mm above, or to the underside of<br />
base plate, whichever is the lowest, shall be primed with a low viscosity<br />
primer and coated with two coats of a light grey colored epoxy paint with a<br />
minimum thickness of 125 microns per coat. This will protect the concrete in<br />
the splash zone against ingress of aggressive salts. Application trials shall be<br />
carried out on the chosen coating. Concrete surface preparation and<br />
application shall be strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer’s<br />
re<strong>com</strong>mendations.<br />
METHOD B<br />
Concrete shall be cast or placed onto polythene sheeting 1000 gauge<br />
laid over the concrete blinding. Overlap shall be 150 mm and the<br />
sheeting shall extend 150 mm beyond the edge of all foundations.<br />
Approved membranes are “Visqueen” by I.C.I plastics or “Duraplane” by<br />
British Cellophone Ltd. Or approved equal.<br />
After the foundations have been painted as specified below the 150<br />
mm extension shall be folded up flush with the sides of foundations.<br />
Surfaces below ground level shall be coated with 3 coats of modified<br />
bitumen to give a total coat thickness of 1mm. A square scrape master<br />
sample shall be taken to determine the weight of specified thickness of<br />
coating from a 300 mm x 300 mm patch. The weight can then be<br />
<strong>com</strong>pared with test samples.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 20 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
Backfill material shall be select fill material so as to avoid damage to<br />
protective coatings.<br />
Exposed external concrete surfaces for a depth of 150mm below ground level<br />
and 300mm above, or to the underside of base plate, whichever is the<br />
lowest, shall be primed with a low viscosity primer and coated with two<br />
coats of a light grey colored epoxy paint with a minimum thickness of 125<br />
microns per coat. This will protect the concrete in the splash zone<br />
against ingress of aggressive salts. Application trials shall be carried out<br />
on the chosen coating. Concrete surface preparation and application shall be<br />
strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer’s re<strong>com</strong>mendations. Where<br />
saline water has been used to <strong>com</strong>pact site fill. Surface protection for<br />
concrete below ground level shall be as per Method A except that wrapping<br />
with 1000-gauge polythene can be omitted.<br />
Where fresh water has been used to <strong>com</strong>pact site fill no applied protection is<br />
required.<br />
10.1 External Surfaces Exposed to Saline Waters<br />
Details shall be specified on construction drawings.<br />
11. CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER<br />
In hot weather (above 40 deg C) special precautions shall be<br />
necessary to avoid the loss of moisture and/or rapid stiffening of the<br />
concrete, which prevents its proper <strong>com</strong>paction, can cause thermal and<br />
plastic cracking and a reduction in strength and durability.<br />
During hot weather, the concreting shall be done as per the procedure set out<br />
in IS 7861 Part 1. At the time of placing, no part of the concrete shall have a<br />
temperature exceeding 35 deg C. The temperature of concrete can be<br />
reduced by cooling the water and aggregate.<br />
During hot dry weather at the point of placement the fresh concrete shall be<br />
protected from drying winds and solar radiation by the provision of PVC or<br />
similar tented shelter, which shall remain to avoid exposure to the sun.<br />
Suitable method to shelter the surface shall be adopted such that finishing<br />
operations can be carried out whilst it is in place. To prevent early drying and<br />
cracking, the relative humidity shall be kept high and the concrete surfaces<br />
kept moist by spraying with clean water and covered with wet hessian.<br />
11.1 Placing Concrete within the Tidal Range<br />
When concreting is to be carried out under tidal conditions the<br />
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that concrete is placed and <strong>com</strong>pacted before<br />
the seawater rises to the level of the concrete so placed.<br />
No concrete shall be disturbed after salt water has made contact with it. The<br />
top surface of the concrete shall be covered after the initial set has taken<br />
place, to protect it against water action if there is any risk of this occurring.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 21 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER<br />
for approval details of the proposed method for <strong>com</strong>plying with these<br />
requirements.<br />
11.2 Concreting in Adverse Weather<br />
Concreting shall not be permitted when storm or rain appears to be imminent.<br />
In the event that the rain storms or other severe weather conditions occur<br />
unexpectedly, concreting shall be stopped and appropriate temporary stop<br />
ends, vee grooves etc., placed as necessary. To meet such circumstances<br />
the contractor shall always have in readiness on site approved framed<br />
sheeting or tarpaulins for protection of newly placed concrete. Under water<br />
concreting shall be permitted only with the approval of construction manager.<br />
Concrete placed under water may be lowered in bottom opening skips or may<br />
be fed continuously through an approved tremie pipe. Unless otherwise<br />
agreed with the construction manager, the cement content of any concrete<br />
mix to be placed under water shall be increased by 20%.<br />
12. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE<br />
Samples from fresh concrete which is to be used in the works shall be taken<br />
as per IS 1199 and cubes shall be made, cured and tested at 28 days in<br />
accordance with IS 516. The Contractor shall carry out the tests in an<br />
approved laboratory or in the field at his own expense, with prior consent of<br />
the Engineer.<br />
Facilities required for testing materials and concrete in the field such as<br />
testing machine with an operator shall be made available at the Engineer's<br />
request.<br />
Frequency of sampling and acceptance criteria for strength tests shall be as<br />
per clauses 15 and 16 of IS:456. Concrete test cubes may be cured by<br />
accelerated methods as described in IS 9013. Cubes may also be optionally<br />
tested at 7 days or at the time of striking the formwork. However, in all cases,<br />
the 28 days <strong>com</strong>pressive strength specified in IS 456 shall be the<br />
criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.<br />
For pre casting work additional cubes shall be taken and tested at 3 days or<br />
prior to lifting. Higher rate of sampling will be required at the beginning of<br />
the Construction period in order to establish the level of quality control<br />
or where there are critical elements. All samples shall be clearly<br />
marked with their identification and accurate records shall be maintained.<br />
These records shall include but not be limited to:<br />
• Identification of test cube<br />
• Date and time of sampling<br />
• Mix designation<br />
• Location of sample after batching (e.g. Drawing No,)<br />
• Method of <strong>com</strong>paction<br />
• Date of testing<br />
• Cement type and source<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 22 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
• Volume of pour<br />
• Age of sample in days<br />
• Weight of sample in KGs<br />
• Density in kg/m3<br />
• Crushing load in Newton<br />
• Crushing strength N/mm2<br />
• Signature of person taking sample<br />
• Signature of person carrying out tests<br />
The concrete will be deemed to <strong>com</strong>ply with the specified design<br />
strength provided the acceptance criteria in IS 456 are met.<br />
If any test results fail to <strong>com</strong>ply with the above then the quantity of concrete<br />
represented by the results shall be at risk, and may be required to be<br />
removed and replaced. The 28 days cube crushing results shall be grouped<br />
consecutively in different groups and each group shall have standard<br />
deviation as specified IS 456<br />
If the standard deviation is greater than this, the concrete production shall be<br />
reviewed. 7-Day Tests (In situ Concrete)<br />
• Tests shall be carried out at 7 days to establish a relationship between the<br />
7-day and 28 day strengths. The relationship shall be used to interpret further<br />
test results in order to predict the probable value of the corresponding 28-day<br />
strengths.<br />
• Notice shall be given without delay of any 7 day test results which indicates<br />
that the corresponding 28 day test results are likely to fail to meet the<br />
specified strength, so that necessary action can be taken to minimize the<br />
effect of such possible failure.<br />
3 Day Tests (Pre-cast Concrete)<br />
• For pre-cast concrete tests shall be carried out at 3 and 7 days to establish<br />
the relationship with the 28 day results.<br />
There shall be no production tests on blinding concrete.<br />
13. OPTIONAL TESTS<br />
If the Engineer feels that the materials, i.e. cement, aggregates,<br />
reinforcement, and water, are not in accordance with <strong>specification</strong> or if<br />
specified concrete strengths are not obtained, he may order tests to be<br />
carried out on these materials in an approved laboratory as per relevant IS<br />
codes. The Contractor shall not be required to bear the costs of such tests<br />
unless they reveal defective material workmanship. If the works cubes do not<br />
give the stipulated strengths, the Engineer reserves the right to ask the<br />
Contractor to dismantle and reconstruct such unacceptable work at the<br />
Contractor's cost. In such a case, any other tests such as load tests,<br />
taking out concrete cores and tests on cores, sonic testing etc shall be carried<br />
out by the Contractor if directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall carry<br />
out all such tests at his own cost.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 23 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
14. INSPECTION<br />
All materials, workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to<br />
the continuous inspection and approval of the Engineer. All materials<br />
supplied by the Contractor and all construction performed by the Contractor,<br />
rejected as not in conformity with the <strong>specification</strong>s and drawings shall<br />
be immediately replaced by the contractor at no cost to the Owner.<br />
15. CLEAN UP<br />
Upon the <strong>com</strong>pletion of concrete work, all debris, scraps of wood, etc.,<br />
resulting from the work shall be removed and the premises left clean.<br />
16. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIQUID RETAINING<br />
16.1 STRUCTURES<br />
To ensure that strength, durability and impermeability will be adequate for<br />
liquid retaining structures; the minimum cement content shall be 330 kg/m3. A<br />
maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45 shall be used. For reinforced concrete<br />
the cement content shall not exceed 400 kg/m3 when ordinary Portland<br />
cement is used.<br />
In general, external type PVC water bars, minimum 230 mm wide, are<br />
preferred and shall be incorporated<br />
where suitable in all construction and expansion joints as shown on the<br />
drawings. Intersection pieces shall be factory made. Only butt jointing of<br />
identical sections shall be carried out on site, strictly in accordance with<br />
manufactures <strong>specification</strong>s. Care shall be taken at all times to ensure that<br />
water bars are not perforated or damaged in any way, concrete shall be<br />
carefully placed and <strong>com</strong>pacted to ensure dense impervious concrete.<br />
Particular attention shall be paid to the placing and vibration of the concrete<br />
to ensure well-<strong>com</strong>pacted concrete around the ribs of the water bars. At all<br />
joints the concrete shall be placed up to the centre line of the water bar.<br />
16.2 Testing Of Liquid Retaining Structures<br />
For a test of liquid retention, the structure shall be cleaned and initially filled to<br />
the normal level with the specified liquid (usually water) at a uniform rate of<br />
not greater than 2 m in 24h. When first filled, the liquid level shall be<br />
maintained by the addition of further liquid for a stabilizing period of seven<br />
days. After the stabilizing period the level of the liquid surface shall be<br />
recorded at 24h intervals for a test period of 7 days. During this 7 day test<br />
period, the total permissible drop in level, after allowing for evaporation, shall<br />
not exceed 40 mm.<br />
Notwithstanding the satisfactory <strong>com</strong>pletion of the test, any evidence of<br />
seepage of the liquid at the outside face of the liquid retaining walls shall<br />
be given remedial treatment from the liquid face. Should the structure not<br />
satisfy the 7 day test, then after <strong>com</strong>pletion of the remedial work, it shall be<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 24 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
retested.<br />
16.3 Testing of Roof<br />
The roof of liquid retaining structures shall be watertight and shall be tested<br />
on <strong>com</strong>pletion by flooding the roof with water to a minimum depth of 25<br />
mm for 24 hours or longer. The roof shall be considered satisfactory, if<br />
no leaks or damp patches show on the soffit. Should the structure not<br />
satisfy the test, remedial work shall be carried out after obtaining the<br />
Engineer’s approval. After <strong>com</strong>pletion of the remedial work it shall be<br />
retested in accordance with this clause. Waterproofing to the roof shall<br />
be <strong>com</strong>pleted as soon as possible after satisfactory testing.<br />
17. PLUM CONCRETE<br />
Stone aggregate of size up to 300-mm cube, but less than 1/3 of the least<br />
dimension to be concreted, called plums, shall not exceed 20% of total<br />
volume of finished concrete, and they shall be well dispersed throughout the<br />
mass. This shall be achieved by placing a layer of normal concrete, then<br />
spreading the plums, followed by another layer of concrete and so on.<br />
Each layer shall be of such thickness as to ensure at least 100 mm of<br />
concrete around each plum. Care must be taken to ensure that no air<br />
is trapped underneath the stones and that the concrete does not work<br />
away from their underside. The plums must have no adhesive coating.<br />
18. WORKABILITY<br />
The concrete mix shall be designed by varying the relative proportion of fine<br />
and coarse aggregates to ensure adequate workability for working it into<br />
corners and angles of the formwork and around the reinforcement<br />
without segregation of the materials or bleeding of the free water at the<br />
surface. On striking the formwork, the concrete shall present a face,<br />
which is uniform, free from honey<strong>com</strong>bing, surface crazing or excessive<br />
dusting. To confirm the workability of the designed mix for each grade of<br />
concrete, a series of workability tests shall be carried out on the preliminary<br />
trial mixes, unless acceptable data exists.<br />
19. INITIAL SETTING TIME<br />
The initial setting time shall be not less than ½ hour after the production<br />
concrete is discharged into he forms and with a maximum time between<br />
mixing and <strong>com</strong>pletion of placing concrete shall not exceed 1 hour. The total<br />
time between mixing and initial set shall be a minimum of 1 hour.<br />
There shall be a maximum setting time of 6 hours.<br />
When trial mixes are made to determine the workability of the<br />
concrete, the initial setting time of the cement paste shall be determined<br />
as per IS 8142.<br />
20. SLUMP<br />
The slump of the structural concrete mixes shall be such that the concrete<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 25 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
can be transported, placed into the forms, and <strong>com</strong>pacted without<br />
segregation. Slump for pumpable concrete shall be determined by site trials<br />
and shall at least be 100 mm on site of pouring.<br />
21. PRECAST CONCRETE<br />
21.1 General<br />
The requirements of this Specification relating to concrete and reinforcement<br />
shall be observed so far as they are applicable to reinforced concrete. In<br />
addition the following requirements specifically relating to pre-cast work<br />
should be met.<br />
21.2 Recasting Yard<br />
The yard in which precasting work is to be undertaken shall be clean<br />
and shall have firm level beds, preferably of concrete, with drainage<br />
channels between the beds. The beds shall have a surface of suitable<br />
quality to give the pre-cast units the required class of finish.<br />
Where pre-cast units have projecting reinforcement the moulds shall, if<br />
necessary, be raised on stools above the general level of the precasting yard.<br />
21.3 Moulds for Pre-cast Concrete<br />
The moulds shall be strongly constructed, closely jointed and true to<br />
the required shape with edges, corners and surfaces which <strong>com</strong>ply with the<br />
relevant class of finish. Moulds are to be so designed that they can be readily<br />
taken apart and reassembled.<br />
21.4 Marking<br />
All units shall be marked on the face which will not be exposed in the<br />
permanent works, with the date of manufacture and such distinguishing<br />
letters or numbers required for erection identification.<br />
21.5 Curing, Maturing and Stacking<br />
The production schedules shall allow for proper curing and maturing of<br />
pre-cast concrete and shall be carried out as approved. The sides of the<br />
moulds may be removed after not less than 12 hours provided that the<br />
concrete has thoroughly set. All concrete surfaces shall be kept covered with<br />
thoroughly wetted hessian for at least 7 days.<br />
Slinging, transporting and stacking may take place when designed handling<br />
stresses have been attained, but building or setting in the works shall not<br />
be permitted until the 28 days cube strength has been reached.<br />
The time periods required for gain of strength of concrete may be<br />
reduced where approved special techniques are adopted such as vacuum<br />
or pressed concrete, steam curing or when a rapid hardening cement is used.<br />
No methods of accelerated curing shall be used without prior approval.<br />
21.6 Cement/Sand Mortar<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 26 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
Cement/sand mortar for bedding and jointing pre-cast members shall be of<br />
equivalent strength, quality and color to that of the concrete member being<br />
bedded or jointed. Cement/sand mortar shall be mixed in small quantities and<br />
used immediately. Particular attention shall be paid to <strong>com</strong>pacting the<br />
cement/sand mortar to prevent the formation of voids and air pockets. The<br />
mortar mix shall bedetermined from tests following the re<strong>com</strong>mendations of<br />
Indian Standard, alternatively grouting may be considered.<br />
21.7 Surfaces for Structural Connections (Marine Structures)<br />
The surfaces of pre-cast concrete slabs and other units, which are to be in<br />
contact with in situ concrete, shall be prepared to achieve a good bond<br />
between the concrete unit and the adjoining concrete. The<br />
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER his<br />
proposals for preparation of a suitable surface.<br />
22. GROUTING<br />
22.1 General<br />
• Where equipment manufacturer’s drawings define a grouting<br />
procedure, said procedure shall be followed, subject to the approval of<br />
Construction Manager.<br />
• All re<strong>com</strong>mendation and instructions of the grout manufacturer shall be<br />
followed by contractor.<br />
• No grout shall be placed when the outside temperature is below 5 °C unless<br />
special approval provisions are made against freezing.<br />
• The minimum <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of grout shall be at least equal to the<br />
parent concrete.<br />
22.2 Material<br />
• Sand cement dry pack shall be proportioned at the site, but all non-shrink<br />
grouts shall consist of only pre-measured, pre-packaged material supplied by<br />
the grout manufacturer, except water.<br />
• Water to be used for mixing Portland cement grout shall be clean, potable<br />
and free from all deleterious materials such as oils, acids, alkalis and organic<br />
materials.<br />
22.3 Grout Types<br />
Sand Cement Dry Pack and Ordinary Mortar Grout<br />
• Cement shall be Portland cement and shall conform to the requirements of<br />
IS 269.<br />
• Sand shall be mixed at two to one ratio by weight with the cement with a<br />
ramming consistency and shall have a minimum <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of 15<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 27 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
N/mm2 at 7 days.<br />
Non-shrink Cement Based Grout<br />
• Non-shrink cement based grout must have a full range of consistencies,<br />
including dry pack, plastic and flowable state to be suitable for used in a<br />
variety of applications.<br />
• Grout should be capable of being pumped flowable without segregation.<br />
Vibration only when expressly stated by manufacturer.<br />
• Grout working time shall be minimum of 60 minutes regardless of application<br />
consistency used.<br />
• The grout shall contain no metallic substances (catalyzed or non catalyzed),<br />
aluminum powder, water reducing agents, fluidizers, accelerators, super<br />
plasticizers, or other materials known to increase drying shrinkage and/ or<br />
<strong>com</strong>promise long term durability.<br />
• Non-shrink cement based grout shall have a minimum <strong>com</strong>pressive strength<br />
of 50 N/mm2 at 7 days.<br />
Non-shrink Epoxy Grout<br />
• Grout shall be 100 % solids system with the ability to be placed in flowable<br />
state.<br />
• Non-shrink epoxy shall have a minimum allowable <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of<br />
60 N/mm2 at 7 days.<br />
22.4 Grout Type Selection<br />
• When the application is an unobstructed bearing plate or void which is not<br />
subject to impact<br />
or vibrations and allows the easy placement of grout without undue man-hour<br />
expenditure, used a sand cement dry pack or an ordinary mortar grout.<br />
• If one of the criteria cited in 1 is not met (i.e. obstructed bearing plate or void<br />
or subject to impact or vibration) then use a pre-packaged, pre-measured,<br />
non-shrink, cement based grout.<br />
22.5 Storage<br />
• Non-shrink cement based grout and epoxy grout aggregates shall be<br />
prepared by contractor in sound, dry bags and epoxy grout liquid <strong>com</strong>ponents<br />
in sealed hardener and resin containers. Contractor shall be responsible for<br />
storing the grout in a dry, weatherproof area and within a temperature range<br />
of 4 °C to 32 °C.<br />
• Any material which be<strong>com</strong>es damp or otherwise defective shall be<br />
immediately removed from the site by contractor at his own expense.<br />
22.6 Surface Preparation<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 28 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
• All surfaces to be grouted shall be entirely free of oil, grease, dirt, wax,<br />
laitance, curing <strong>com</strong>pounds and other foreign substances that may interfere<br />
with <strong>com</strong>plete bearing or bonding.<br />
• When removing laitance, a hand held pneumatic chipping hammer shall be<br />
of the largest tool, contractor shall take the utmost care to prevent any<br />
possible structural damage that could be caused by improperly or negligently<br />
removing the laitance.<br />
• When any cement based grouts are used, concrete surfaces shall be<br />
saturated with water for 24 hours prior to grout placement. Excess water shall<br />
be removed just prior to grouting.<br />
• When epoxy grouts are used, all surfaces shall be made <strong>com</strong>pletely dry<br />
prior to grouting.<br />
22.7 Leveling and Alignment<br />
• Prior to <strong>com</strong>mencing grouting equipment bases, column bases or anchor<br />
bolts, leveling and alignment shall be performed to place and maintain said<br />
items in their final position during grouting.<br />
• A minimum grout space of 25 mm shall be provided unless specified<br />
otherwise on the drawing.<br />
• All metal surfaces which are to be in direct contact with the grout shall be<br />
thoroughly cleaned and made free of all grease, oil, dirt, wax or other foreign<br />
substance.<br />
• Leveling shims shall be removed when they would prevent uniform bearing<br />
under the base support such as tower bases rings. Removal of the shim shall<br />
be delayed long enough to ensure against disturbing the grout. Voids where<br />
shims have been removed shall be <strong>com</strong>pletely packed with grout before<br />
finishing.<br />
22.8 Mixing<br />
• Grout types shall be mixed according to manufacturer’s re<strong>com</strong>mended<br />
procedures.<br />
• Epoxy grout <strong>com</strong>ponent ratio shall not be changed from that re<strong>com</strong>mended<br />
by the<br />
manufacturers. No solvent or thinners shall be added to the mix.<br />
• The amount of water added to a non-shrink cement based grout will<br />
determine its consistency. The lowest water/ grout ratio need to get the<br />
grout in place should be used.<br />
22.9 Placement<br />
• Grout placement shall proceed in a manner that assures the filling of all<br />
voids and the intimate contact of grouting materials with surfaces to be<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 29 of 30
SPECIFICATIONS FOR<br />
CONCRETE WORK<br />
grouted.<br />
• The placement of grout shall be rapid and continuous so as to avoid cold<br />
joints under any base plate.<br />
• All grouting shall be done in one direction only, placing grout on one side<br />
and working it to the other. Placement will be such as to provide full and<br />
uniform bearing under all foundation bearing surfaces.<br />
• All exposed grout shall be provided with a 25 mm, chamfer, unless<br />
otherwise directed by purchaser’s Construction Manager.<br />
22.10 Curing<br />
• Grout shall be cured according to manufacturer’s re<strong>com</strong>mendations.<br />
• Forms shall remain in place with a minimum of 24 hours regardless of<br />
whether grout is cement based or epoxy.<br />
• Cement based grout shall be protected from extreme drying conditions.<br />
• Epoxy grout shall not be wet cured.<br />
• The temperature of the base plate, concrete foundations and grout shall be<br />
maintained between 4°C and 32 °C during grouting and for a minimum of 24<br />
hours thereafter.<br />
22.11 Testing<br />
Field-testing of non-shrink grouts shall be as directed by Construction<br />
Manager. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing, storage, curing and<br />
transporting the test samples to a laboratory for testing, as required by<br />
Construction Manager.<br />
23. READY MIX CONCRETE<br />
Contractor may use ready-mix concrete locally available provided that ready<br />
mix concrete satisfies all the criteria for materials as specified in this<br />
<strong>specification</strong>. Prior approval shall be taken from WP/HPCL before selecting<br />
source of ready mix concrete with necessary results of ready mix concrete<br />
quality. Contractor shall not make extra claim on use of ready mix concrete.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0002 Page 30 of 30
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
1. SCOPE<br />
This <strong>specification</strong> covers the material and workmanship requirements for the following masonry<br />
works in foundations, substructure, parts of super-structure, security wall, nibble soling for floors<br />
on grade, etc. as applicable. This <strong>specification</strong> also defines the materials and workmanship<br />
requirements for pointing and plaster.<br />
i. Brick masonry<br />
ii. Stone masonry<br />
iii. Precast concrete block masonry<br />
iv. Allied works<br />
All masonry work shall be true to line and level as shown on drawings and shall be tightly built<br />
against structural members and bonded with dowels, inserts, etc-, as shown in drawings.<br />
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS<br />
2.1 Codes and standards<br />
The Indian Standards and other referred standards (including all amendments and<br />
revisions) shall be considered as part of this Specification. In case any particular aspect of work<br />
is not covered specifically by these or any other relevant Indian Standard Specification, any other<br />
good engineering practice as may be specified by the <strong>com</strong>pany shall be followed:<br />
Following Indian standards including all amendments and revisions shall be considered as<br />
part of this <strong>specification</strong>.<br />
IS 269<br />
Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland cement<br />
IS 456<br />
IS 1077<br />
IS 1123<br />
Code of Practice for Plain & Reinforced Concrete<br />
Specification for Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks<br />
Specification for Method of- Identification of Natural Building Stones.<br />
Specification for Method of Test For Determination of Water Absorption. Apparent Specific Gravity<br />
and Porosity of Natural Building Stones.<br />
IS 1127<br />
Re<strong>com</strong>mendations for Dimensions and Workmanship of Natural Building<br />
Stones for Masonry Work<br />
IS 1129<br />
Re<strong>com</strong>mendation for Dressing of Natural Building Stones.<br />
IS 1200<br />
Indian Standard for Method of Measurement of Building<br />
and Civil Engineering Works, (Part 3 - Brickwork: Part 4 - Stone<br />
IS 1397<br />
Indian Standard Specification for Kraft paper.<br />
IS 1597(Parts 1 & 2) Code of Practice for Construction of Stone Masonry<br />
IS 1661<br />
Finishes<br />
Code of Practice for Application of Cement and Cement Lime Plaster<br />
IS 1725 Specification for Soil Based Blocks used in General Building<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 2 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
Construction.<br />
IS 1905<br />
Masonry.<br />
IS 2116<br />
Indian Standard Code of Practice For Structural use of Reinforced<br />
Specification of Sand for Masonry Mortar.<br />
IS 2180 Specification for Heavy duty burnt-clay building bricks. IS 2185<br />
Concrete masonry Units<br />
Part 1: Hollow and Solid concrete blocks<br />
Part 2: Hollow and solid light weight concrete blocks. Part 3: Autoclaved cellular Aerated concrete<br />
blocks.<br />
IS 2212<br />
Code of Practice for Brick work<br />
IS 2250<br />
Code of Practice for Preparation and Use of Masonry Mortars.<br />
IS 2386 Method of Test for Aggregates for Concrete :<br />
Part 1: Particle size and shape.<br />
Part 2: Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities. Part 3: Specific gravity, density,<br />
voids, absorption and bulking.<br />
IS 2402<br />
Code of practice for External Rendered Finishes.<br />
IS 2572<br />
IS 2645<br />
IS 2691<br />
Code of practice for Construction of hollow concrete block masonry<br />
Specification for Integral Cement Water Proofing Compounds.<br />
Indian Standard Specification for Burnt Clay Facing Bricks.<br />
Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water used in industry.<br />
IS 3316<br />
Specification for Structural granite.<br />
IS 3495(Parts 1 to 4) Methods of Tests of burnt Clay Building Bricks.<br />
IS 3620<br />
IS 3696<br />
Specification for Laterite stone block for masonry.<br />
Indian Standard Safety Code of Scaffolds and Ladders (Part 1 – Scaffold<br />
Part 2 - Ladders)<br />
IS 5454<br />
IS 6042<br />
IS 8112<br />
Methods of Sampling of Clay Building Bricks<br />
Code of Practice for Construction of lightweight concrete masonry.<br />
43 grade ordinary Portland cement various applicable standards.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 3 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
2.2 Other Standards / <strong>specification</strong>s<br />
Specification for Concrete Work.<br />
3. MATERIALS<br />
3.1 General<br />
Material to be used for masonry shall <strong>com</strong>ply with the IS codes listed in section 2.<br />
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amount of oils, acids,<br />
alkalies, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious for the<br />
masonry or concrete surfaces. Permissible limits for solids tested according to IS 3025 shall be as<br />
given in Table 1 of IS 456.<br />
3.2 Sand for Masonry and for Plaster<br />
Sand or fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel<br />
sand or a <strong>com</strong>bination of any of these. Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from<br />
adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust<br />
more than specified as given in the table below.<br />
Deleterious Material<br />
Sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron, pyrites, alkalis, slates, coals or other<br />
organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shale in such<br />
form or in such quantities as to adversely affect the hardening, strength or durability of the<br />
mortar. The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in sand shall not<br />
exceed the following limits:<br />
Clay, fine silt and fine dust, in natural sand or<br />
crushed gravel sand and crushed stone when<br />
determined in accordance with IS 2386<br />
Not more than 5% by mass<br />
Mica<br />
Organic impurities when determined in accordance with IS<br />
2386 (part 2)<br />
Not more than 2% by mass<br />
Colour of the liquid shall be lighter than the<br />
standard solution prepared as per section 6.2.2<br />
of IS 2386 (part 2)<br />
Grading of sand for use in masonry mortar shall conform to IS 2116.<br />
Grading of sand for use in plaster shall conform to IS 1542.<br />
Sand or fine aggregate shall be tested for organic impurities, particle size, silt content and bulking<br />
in accordance with IS 2386 Part I, II and III.<br />
3.3 Brick<br />
Bricks for masonry works shall conform to IS 1077 and shall be of class 7.5 with minimum<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 4 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
<strong>com</strong>pressive strength of 7.5N/mm2. Specific requirement for any other class of bricks shall be as<br />
shown on drawings. Physical requirements, quality, dimensions, tolerances, etc., of <strong>com</strong>mon burnt<br />
clay building bricks shall conform to the requirements of IS 1077.<br />
Bricks shall be hand-molded or machine molded and shall be made from suitable soils. The bricks<br />
shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be well burnt, sound,<br />
hard, tough and uniform in colour. These shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stones or lumps<br />
of any kind.<br />
A clear metallic ringing sound shall be emitted when two bricks are struck together. After<br />
24 hours immersion in cold water, water absorption by weight shall not exceed 20% of the dry<br />
weight of the brick. They shall not break when thrown on ground on their flat surface from a height<br />
of 1.6 metre, in saturated condition.<br />
The tolerance permitted in the accepted size of bricks shall be plus or minus 3mm in any<br />
dimension. Only bricks of one standard size shall be used in one work unless specifically<br />
permitted by the COMPANY. Each brick shall have the manufacturer's identification mark or initial<br />
mark clearly in the frog.<br />
All bricks proposed to be used shall conform to the approved samples in all respects. Any brick<br />
found not up to the <strong>specification</strong> shall be removed from the site immediately at the<br />
CONTRACTOR's cost.<br />
3.4 Stone<br />
All Stones used for masonry works shall conform to the requirements of IS 1123, IS 1127, and IS<br />
1129. Stones shall be of approved quality, hard, dense, strong, sound, durable, clean and<br />
uniform in colour.<br />
They shall also be free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amount of alkalis, vegetable<br />
matters and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, sea shells,<br />
etc. Unless otherwise approved, stones from one single quarry shall be used for any one work.<br />
The strength of stones should be adequate to carry the imposed load. The minimum crushing<br />
strength of building stones shall be 20 N/mm2 unless higher minimum strength is specified in any<br />
particular case. The percentage of water absorption, when tested in accordance with IS 1124, shall<br />
not exceed 5%.<br />
Stones used shall normally be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. The length of the<br />
stone shall not exceed 3 times the height. Width of stone on base shall not be less than<br />
150mm and in no case exceed 3/4th thickness of the wall. Height of the stone shall not be more<br />
than 300mm.<br />
3.5 Cement<br />
Unless otherwise specified, cement used for cement-sand mortar shall be Grade 33 OPC<br />
conforming to IS 269.<br />
3.6 Lime<br />
Hydrated lime used for masonry mortar shall conform to IS 712. Hydrated lime shall be<br />
supplied in suitable containers such as jute bags lined with polythene or high density polythene<br />
woven bags lined with polythene or craft paper bags preferably containing 50 kg. of dry lime.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 5 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
3.7 Water<br />
Water used for masonry work shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of<br />
deleterious materials. Potable water are generally considered satisfactory for mortar making and<br />
curing in masonry work.<br />
4. MORTAR<br />
4.1 Cement Mortar<br />
Mortar for brick work shall be prepared in accordance with IS:2250.<br />
4.1.1 Proportioning<br />
Cement bag weighing 50 kg shall be taken as 0.035 cubic metre. Other ingredients in specified<br />
proportion shall be measured by volume using gauge boxes of suitable capacity. Sand shall be<br />
measured on the basis of its dry volume.<br />
Unless otherwise specified on drawings, the cement-sand mix proportion (by volume) for the<br />
mortar shall be as follows<br />
Brick masonry less than one brick thick 1:4<br />
Brick masonry equal to and more than one brick thick 1:6<br />
Stone masonry 1:6<br />
Concrete block masonry 1:6<br />
The minimum <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of masonry mortar shall be as follows:<br />
1:4 Mortar 7.5 N/mm2.<br />
1:6 Mortar 3 N/mm2.<br />
4.1.2 Mixing<br />
The mixing of mortar shall be done in mechanical mixers operated by power or manually as<br />
decided by the Engineer. The Engineer may however, permit hand mixing at his discretion taking<br />
into account the nature, magnitude and location of the work and practicability of the use of<br />
mechanical mixers or where item involving small quantities are to be done or if in his<br />
opinion the use of mechanical mixers is not feasible.<br />
In cases, where mechanical mixers are not to be used, the Contractor shall take<br />
permission of the Engineer in writing before the <strong>com</strong>mencement of the work.<br />
4.1.3 Mechanical Mixing<br />
Cement and sand in the specified proportions shall be mixed dry thoroughly in a mixer. Water shall<br />
then be added gradually and wet mixing continued for at least three minutes. Only the<br />
required quantity of water shall be added which will produce mortar of workable<br />
consistency. Only the quantity of mortar which can be used within 30 minutes of its mixing shall<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 6 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
be prepared at a time. Mixer shall be cleaned with water each time before suspending the work.<br />
4.1.4 Hand Mixing<br />
The measured quantity of sand shall be leveled on a clean water tight platform and cement<br />
bags emptied on top. The cement and sand heap shall be thoroughly mixed dry by being<br />
turned over and over, backwards and forwards, several times till the mixture is of a<br />
uniform colour. The quantity of dry mix, which can be used within 30 minutes, shall then be<br />
mixed in a masonry trough with just sufficient quantity of water to bring the mortar to a stiff paste of<br />
necessary working consistency.<br />
4.1.5 Precautions<br />
Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it begins to set, and in any case<br />
within half an hour after the water is added to the dry mixture.<br />
4.2 Cement Lime Sand Mortar<br />
Cement-lime-sand mortar for masonry works shall be prepared in accordance with IS 2250.<br />
The proportioning of mix shall be as shown in drawings.<br />
Lime putty shall be obtained by adding hydrated lime to water in a tank and stirring it to the<br />
consistency of cream and allowing it to stand not more than 2 days. The putty shall be allowed to<br />
mature but not allowed to dry out till it is used.<br />
Sand shall be measured on the basis of its dry volume. In case of damp sand, its<br />
quantity shall be suitably increased to allow for bulkage54 as per IS 2386 (part 3)<br />
Cement, lime putty/dry hydrated lime and sand shall be taken in specified proportions. Lime<br />
putty and sand shall be ground in a mortar mill before mixing the same with cement. In case where<br />
factory made dry hydrated lime powder is used, prior grinding of lime and sand in a mortar mill is<br />
not necessary. In that case the mixing may be done in one single operation in the mechanical<br />
mixer.<br />
In case of small works, where the COMPANY permits hand mixing, in view of mortar mill and<br />
mechanical mixer not being feasible, cement and sand shall be mixed in clean watertight<br />
masonry platforms or troughs. Milk of lime prepared by mixing water and lime putty, shall be<br />
added to mixture of cement and sand. Then the mixture shall be hoed back and forth for about 10<br />
minutes with addition of milk of lime, care being taken to add this milk of lime to the extent required<br />
for giving the mortar the consistency of a stiff paste.<br />
The mortar thus prepared shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and in any case within<br />
one hour the cement is mixed wet. Mixture of lime putty and sand can be kept for a period of 72<br />
hours, provided it is kept damp with wet sacks or by suitable means approved by the COMPANY<br />
and not allowed to dry.<br />
Mortar not formed as per <strong>specification</strong>s or laying unused after the periods specified above or found<br />
partly set or dried or otherwise spoilt shall be rejected and removed from site of work at<br />
CONTRACTOR's cost.<br />
Unless otherwise specified in drawings, the mortar used for masonry work shall be of<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 7 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
proportion 1 cement: 1 lime: 6 graded sand.<br />
5. BRICK MASONRY<br />
5.1 General<br />
Bricks used in masonry shall be <strong>com</strong>mon burnt clay bricks conforming to IS 1077 or IS 2180.<br />
Common burnt clay bricks shall be classified on the basis of average <strong>com</strong>pressive strength as<br />
given in Table 1.<br />
Table 1- Classes of Common Burnt Clay Bricks<br />
Class Designation Average Compressive Strength<br />
Not<br />
Less Than, N/mm2<br />
50 50.0<br />
35 35.0<br />
30 30.0<br />
25 25.0<br />
20 20.0<br />
17.5 17.5<br />
15 15.0<br />
12.5 12.5<br />
10 10.0<br />
7.5 7.5<br />
5 5.0<br />
3.5 3.5<br />
Wherever the construction site is within a radius of 100 kms from a coal/ lignite based thermal<br />
power plant, fly ash shall be used in manufacturing bricks as per MOE&F – see Appendix 1.<br />
5.2 General Quality<br />
Bricks shall be hand moulded or machine moulded and shall be made from suitable soils. They<br />
shall be free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. The bricks shall have smooth<br />
rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in colour and shall emit ringing sound<br />
when struck simply.<br />
5.3 Dimensions<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 8 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
The standard modular or non modular size of <strong>com</strong>mon building bricks shall be as follows:<br />
Type Of Brick Length Width Height<br />
Modular Brick 190 mm x 90 mm x 90 mm<br />
Modular Tile Brick 190 mm x 90 mm x 40 mm<br />
Non Modular Brick 230 mm x 115 mm x 70 mm<br />
Non Modular Tile Brick 230 mm x 115 mm x 40 mm<br />
5.4 Sampling and Test<br />
5.4.1 Sampling<br />
Sampling of bricks shall be in accordance with IS:5454.<br />
5.4.2 Dimensional Tolerances<br />
The dimensions of bricks when tested in accordance with IS:1077 shall be within the limits<br />
specified therein.<br />
5.4.3 Compressive Strength<br />
The bricks, when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS:3495 Part I<br />
shall have a minimum average <strong>com</strong>pressive strength for various classes as given in Table<br />
3. The <strong>com</strong>pressive strength of any individual brick tested shall not fall below the minimum<br />
average <strong>com</strong>pressive strength specified for the corresponding class of brick.<br />
5.4.4 Water Absorption<br />
The average water absorption of bricks when tested in accordance with the procedure laid<br />
down in IS:3495 Part 2 shall not be more than 20% by weight up to Class 12.5 and 15%<br />
by weight for higher classes.<br />
5.4.5 Efflorescence<br />
The rating of efflorescence of bricks when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in<br />
IS:3495 Part 3.Appendix D shall be not more than "moderate" up to Class 12.5 and "slight" for<br />
higher classes. All efflorescence shall be removed on the affected surfaces with a solution<br />
of muriatic acid in water washed fully with clear water and allowed to dry thoroughly.<br />
5.5 Burnt Clay Brick Work<br />
Brickwork shall generally conform to IS 2212.<br />
5.5.1 Classification<br />
The brickwork shall be classified according to the class designation of bricks used.<br />
5.5.2 Mortar<br />
Brickwork shall be constructed in cement mortar 1:5 or as specified (also see section 5.5.13). Lime<br />
shall not be used where reinforcement is provided in brickwork.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 9 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
5.5.3 Soaking of Bricks<br />
Bricks shall be soaked in water such that water just penetrates the whole depth of the bricks. The<br />
soaked bricks shall be removed from water early enough to be skin-dry when lying. Alternatively<br />
bricks may be adequately soaked in stacks by profusely spraying with clean water at regular<br />
intervals for a period not less than six hours. Soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean place<br />
where they are not spoiled by dirt, earth and the like.<br />
Note: The period of soaking shall be found at site by a field test. The bricks shall be soaked in<br />
water for different periods and then broken to find the extent of water penetration. The<br />
least period that corresponds to <strong>com</strong>plete soaking will be the one that shall be allowed for in<br />
construction work.<br />
5.5.4 Laying<br />
Bricks shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified.<br />
Half or cut bricks shall not be used except as closers to <strong>com</strong>plete the bond. Closers in such cases,<br />
shall<br />
be cut to the required size and used near the ends of the wall. Header bond shall be used<br />
preferably in all courses in curved plan for ensuring better alignment.<br />
Note:<br />
Header bond shall also be used in foundation footings unless the thickness of walls (width<br />
of footing) makes the use of headers impracticable. Where the thickness of footing is<br />
uniform for a number of courses, the top course of footing shall be headers. All loose materials,<br />
dirt and set lumps of mortar which may be lying over the surface on which brick work is to be<br />
freshly started, shall be removed with a wire brush and the surface wetted. Bricks shall be laid on a<br />
full bed of mortar. When laying, each brick shall be properly bedded and set in position<br />
by gently pressing with the handle of a trowel. Its inside face shall be buttered with mortar before<br />
the next brick is laid and pressed against it. Joints shall be filled and packed with mortar such that<br />
no hollow space is left. Walls shall be taken up truly in plumb or true to the required batter where<br />
specified. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical.<br />
Vertical joints in alternate courses shall <strong>com</strong>e directly one over the other. Quoin, jambs and other<br />
angles shall be properly plumbed as the work proceeds.<br />
A set of tools <strong>com</strong>prising of wooden straight edge, masonic spirit levels, square, one meter rule<br />
line and plumb shall be kept at the site of work for checking during the progress of work. Each set<br />
of tools shall suffice for three masons. All quoins shall be accurately constructed and the height of<br />
brick courses shall be kept uniform. This will be checked using a graduated wooden straight<br />
edge or a story rod indicating height of each course including thickness of joints. The position<br />
of damp proof course, window sills, bottom of lintels, top of the wall etc. along the height of the wall<br />
shall be marked on the graduated straight edge or story rod. Acute and obtuse quoins shall be<br />
bonded, where practicable in the same way as square quoins.<br />
Obtuse quoins shall be formed with squint showing three quarters brick on one face and quarter<br />
brick on the other. The brick work shall be built in uniform layers. No part of the wall during its<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 10 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
construction shall rise more than one metre above the general construction level. Parts of wall left<br />
at different levels shall be raked back at an angle of 45 degrees or less with the horizontal.<br />
Toothing shall not be permitted as an alternative to raking back. For half brick partition to be keyed<br />
into main walls, indents shall be left in the main walls. Block work shall not be carried out in more<br />
than a height of 1200 mm in any one day unless otherwise permitted by relevant Indian standards.<br />
All pipe fittings and specials, spouts, hold fasts and other fixtures which are required to be built into<br />
the walls shall be embedded, as specified in their correct position as the work proceeds<br />
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Top courses of all plinths, parapets, steps and top of<br />
walls below floor and roof slabs shall be laid with brick on edge, unless specified otherwise. Brick<br />
on edge laid in the top courses at corner of walls shall be properly<br />
radiated and keyed into position to form cut corners. Where bricks cannot be cut into the<br />
required shape to form cut corners, cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement:2 coarse sand: 4<br />
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) equal to thickness of course shall be provided<br />
in lieu of cut bricks. Bricks shall be laid with the frog up. However, when the top course is exposed,<br />
bricks shall be laid with the frog down. For the bricks to be laid with frog down, the frog shall be<br />
filled with mortar before placing the brick in position.<br />
In case of walls, one brick thick and under, one face shall be kept even and in proper plane, while<br />
the other face may be slightly rough. In case of walls more than one brick thick, both the faces<br />
shall be kept even and in proper plane Pipe sleeves shall be provided for taking service lines<br />
without excessive cutting of <strong>com</strong>pleted work. Such sleeves in external walls shall be sloped down<br />
outward so as to avoid passage of water inside Top of the brick work in coping and sills in external<br />
walls shall be slightly tilted. Where brick coping and cills are projecting beyond the face of the wall,<br />
drip course / throating shall be provided where indicated. Care shall be taken during construction<br />
that edges of jambs, sills and projections are not damaged in case of rain. New built work shall be<br />
covered with jute bags or tarpaulins so as to prevent the mortar from being washed away.<br />
Damage, if any, shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In retaining walls and the<br />
like, where water is likely to accumulate, weep holes, 50 to 75 mm square shall be provided at 2 m<br />
vertically and horizontally unless otherwise specified. The lowest weep hole shall be at about 30<br />
cm above the ground level. All weep holes shall be surrounded by loose stones and shall have<br />
sufficient fall<br />
to drain out the water quickly.<br />
5.5.5 Joints<br />
The thickness of all types of joints including brick wall joints and cross joints shall be<br />
such that four courses and three joints taken consecutively shall measure as follows:<br />
390 mm, in case of modular bricks conforming to IS:1077.<br />
310 mm, in case of non-modular bricks<br />
Note:<br />
Specified thickness of joints shall be 10 mm.<br />
5.5.6 Finishing of Joints<br />
The face of brick work may be finished flush or by pointing. In flush finishing either the face joints<br />
of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished surface flush with the face of<br />
the brick work<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 11 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
or the joints shall be squarely raked out to a depth of 10 mm while the mortar is still green for<br />
subsequent plastering. The faces of brick work shall be cleaned with wire brushes so as to remove<br />
any splashes of mortar.<br />
5.5.7 Openings<br />
Openings shall be square with the jambs vertical and formed with the uncut faces of<br />
blocks using temporary framing installed for this purpose. The jamb walling shall be built up<br />
against framework all around as the work proceeds.<br />
5.5.8 Intersecting Walls and Partitions<br />
Walls and partitions shall be bonded or tied to one another at angles and junctions, unless<br />
movement joints are indicated. Wherever ties are used, they shall consist of 3x20 mm<br />
galvanized steel plate fully embedded in the horizontal mortar joints at vertical spacing not<br />
exceeding 600 mm. The ends of ties shall project a minimum of 75 mm into each wall partition.<br />
5.5.9 Penetrations<br />
Penetrations for services through both external and internal walls shall be properly sealed against<br />
fire and gas.<br />
5.5.10 Fixings<br />
Where fixing blocks, anchors, accessories, wall ties, etc are specified, they shall be built into the<br />
walls or partitions and solidly bedded in mortar. Fixings, which are not built in shall be drilled to the<br />
block work. Expanded bolt fixings shall only be drilled into solid blocks or blocks having their<br />
cavities filled solid.<br />
5.5.11 Curing<br />
The brick work shall be constantly kept moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days.<br />
Brick work done during the day shall be suitably marked with the date on which the work<br />
is done to monitor the curing period.<br />
5.5.12 Scaffolding<br />
Scaffolding shall be strong enough to withstand all dead, live and impact loads which are likely to<br />
<strong>com</strong>e on them. Scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the<br />
work. Only double scaffolding shall be used. Single scaffolding shall be used only when<br />
specifically permitted in writing by Engineer In Charge.<br />
• Single Scaffolding<br />
In single scaffolding, one end of the put-log/pole shall rest in the hole provided in the header<br />
course of rick masonry. Not more than one header for each put-log/pole shall be left out. Such<br />
holes shall not be allowed in the case of pillars, brick work less than one metre in length between<br />
the openings or near the skewbacks of arches or immediately under or near the structural member<br />
supported by the walls. The holes for put logs/poles shall be made good with brick work and wall<br />
finishing as specified.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 12 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
• Double Scaffolding<br />
Where the brick work or tile work is to be exposed and not to be finished with plastering<br />
etc. double scaffolding having two independent supports; clear of the work, shall be provided.<br />
5.5.13 Half Brick Work<br />
Brick work in half brick walls shall be constructed in the same manner as described in<br />
Clause 5.5.4 except that the bricks shall be laid in stretcher bond. These walls shall be<br />
constructed in cement mortar. 1:4. Lime mortar shall not be used. When the half brick work is to be<br />
reinforced two MS bars of 6 mm diameter shall be embedded in every third course. OR 75 mm<br />
thick RCC M15 beams with 2 numbers 8 mm dia high strength deformed bars shall be<br />
provided at a vertical spacing of 1 metre. The reinforcement shall be securely anchored at the end<br />
of the wall. The free ends of reinforcement shall be keyed into the mortar of the main work to which<br />
the half brick work is joined. Laps in reinforcement if any shall not be less than 30 cm.<br />
Depending on the dimensions of the wall, 200 mm x 115 mm RCC mullions at every 3<br />
metres and at corners shall be provided with reinforcement of 4 numbers 8 mm diameter high<br />
strength deformed bars. The steel in the horizontal beams in such cases will run through these<br />
mullions. These partition walls shall be constructed in two stages. In the first stage, brick work with<br />
binders shall be constructed leaving gaps equal to and at the locations of the mullions. In the<br />
second stage mullions shall be constructed.<br />
5.5.14 Acceptance Criteria<br />
The acceptable deviations for brick work shall be as follows:<br />
Deviation from position shown on plan of any brick work shall not exceed 12.5 mm.<br />
Relative displacement between load bearing wall in adjacent stories shall not exceed 6 mm. Brick /<br />
Block work shall be built into the following tolerances:<br />
Tolerance on Line<br />
Length up to and including 5 m<br />
610 mm<br />
Length over 5 m, up to and including 10 m 615 mm Length over 10 m<br />
620 mm<br />
Tolerance on Height and Level<br />
Height up to and including 3 m<br />
65 mm<br />
Height over 3 m, up to and including 6 m 615 mm Height over 6 m 620 mm<br />
Tolerance in Plumb<br />
Height up to 4 m<br />
10 mm<br />
Tolerance in Straightness<br />
Deviation from line shall not be more than 5 mm<br />
Deviation from the specified thickness of all joints shall not exceed one-fifth of specified thickness.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 13 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
5.5.15 REINFORCED BRICKWORK<br />
Where specified, brick walls less than one brick thick shall be provided with 2 numbers 6 mm dia.<br />
M.S. reinforcement bars at every fourth course embedded inside the joint. The free ends of<br />
reinforcement shall be keyed into the mortar joint of main brick work. Round bars shall be<br />
properly lapped, and joints staggered. For brick walls equal to or more than one brick thick,<br />
reinforcement shall be as specified in drawings. Bars shall be lapped with dowels left in R.C.<br />
columns, beams or welded to steel stanchions. Other requirements shall be as applicable for<br />
un-reinforced brickwork.<br />
5.5.16 HONEYCOMB BRICKWORK<br />
Honey<strong>com</strong>b brickwork shall be done with wire cut bricks of specified class and size in specified<br />
mortar as per drawings. The thickness of honey<strong>com</strong>b brickwork shall be that of half brick<br />
unless otherwise specified. The openings shall be equal and alternate with half brick laid with a<br />
bearing of 20mm on either side. The honey<strong>com</strong>b work shall present a uniform pattern. All joints<br />
shall be struck flush to give an even surface. Upon <strong>com</strong>pletion of masonry installation, all<br />
exposed brickwork shall be cleaned of all mortar droppings. As the cleaning progresses, all<br />
masonry work shall be examined and all imperfect joints, nail holes, cracks, etc., carefully pointed<br />
and filled with mortar where required and the horizontal ratings left tooled and clean. The brickwork<br />
shall be cured and protected as specified under clause 5.5.11<br />
5.5.17 CAVITY WALL<br />
One or both leaves of a cavity wall may be of brick (the other being of concrete or other material).<br />
The two leaves of the cavity wall shall be tied by means of specially made wall ties spaced at not<br />
more than four brick lengths apart horizontally and not more than five brick courses<br />
vertically and staggered. Additional ties shall be used near opening. There shall be at least five<br />
ties per square meter of surface area of the wall. Ties shall be sloped away from the inner leaf of<br />
the cavity wall. Ties shall be of hot dip galvanized/non-ferrous metal/stainless steel suitably<br />
twisted at the middle to prevent water flowing along it or round bars bent to oval shape and<br />
twisted in the middle. Small openings shall be left in the exterior leaf approximately 2 meters apart<br />
at the start of masonry so as to facilitate hand cleaning out by means of a rake. These holes<br />
should be closed at the end of construction of the wall after doing the necessary cleaning at<br />
the cavity. During construction of cavity wall, mortar droppings are quite likely to fall into the cavity<br />
and get lodged over ties and be<strong>com</strong>e a constant source of transmittance of moisture. For<br />
preventing this, a wooden batten should be kept over ties during the construction of wall to catch<br />
any mortar droppings.<br />
The batten should be lifted up every time when the next row of ties is reached and the process<br />
repeated as the construction of wall proceeds. The inner surface of outer leaf of the wall<br />
should not encourage splash of dripping water that may penetrate through the outer leaf<br />
and thus transmit dampness to the inner leaf. To avoid this, projections from outer leaf<br />
extending in the cavity should not be allowed. The mix proportion and joint thickness for the mortar<br />
shall be as specified in drawings.<br />
6. RUBBLE MASONRY<br />
Uncoursed Rubble Stone Masonry<br />
6.1 Stone<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 14 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
The stone shall be obtained from quarries approved by the Engineer and shall conform to IS:1597<br />
Part I. Stone shall be hard, sound, durable and free from weathering decay and defects like<br />
cavities, cracks, flaws, sand holes, veins, patches of loose or soft materials and other similar<br />
defects that may adversely affect its strength and appearances. As far as possible, stone shall be<br />
of uniform colour, quality or texture. Generally stone shall not contain crypts crystalline silica or<br />
chart, mica and other deleterious materials like iron oxide, organic<br />
impurities etc. Stone with round surface shall not be used. For Basalt stone the minimum<br />
<strong>com</strong>pressive strength shall be 400 kg/cm2 and the percentage of water absorption shall not<br />
exceed 5%.<br />
6.2 Size of Stone<br />
Unless otherwise indicated, the length of stones shall not exceed three times the height and the<br />
breadth or base shall not be greater than three fourth the thickness of wall or not less than 150<br />
mm. The height of stone may be up to 300 mm. Stones having sharp corners or round surfaces<br />
shall, however, not be used.<br />
6.3 Dressing<br />
Each stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides and the bed. Hammer dressing shall<br />
enable the stones to be laid close to neighbouring stone such that the brushing in the face shall<br />
not project more than 40 mm on the exposed face and 10 mm on the face to be plastered.<br />
6.4 Laying<br />
All stones shall be wetted before use. Each stone shall be placed close to the stones already laid<br />
so that the thickness of the mortar joints at the face is not more than 20 mm. Face<br />
stones shall be arranged suitably to stagger the vertical joints and long vertical joints shall be<br />
avoided. Chips or sprawls of stones may be used for filling of interstices between the<br />
adjacent stones in heartening and these shall not exceed 20% of the quantity of stone<br />
masonry. No hollow space shall be left anywhere in the masonry. The masonry work in wall shall<br />
be carried up true to plumb. Before <strong>com</strong>mencing the masonry work the foundation trenches shall<br />
be leveled right through and bottom of the same watered and well rammed down. The<br />
trenches shall be kept free of water while masonry work is in progress.<br />
6.5 Bond Stones<br />
Bond or through stones running right through the thickness of walls shall be provided in walls up to<br />
600 mm thick and in case of walls above 600 mm thickness a set of two or more bond stones<br />
overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided in a line from face of the wall to the<br />
back. At least one bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided for every 0.5 sq m of the<br />
area of wall surface.<br />
6.6 Quoin and Jamb Stone<br />
The quoin and jamb stones shall be of selected stones neatly dressed with hammer or chisel to<br />
form the required angle. Quoin stones shall not be less than 0.01 cu.meter in volume. Height of<br />
quoins and jamb stones shall not be less than 150 mm. Quoins shall be laid header and stretcher<br />
alternatively.<br />
6.7 Curing<br />
Curing shall be done till the mortar used in masonry is sufficiently set. Masonry work in cement<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 15 of 16
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY WORK<br />
mortar of 1:5 shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days.<br />
6.8 Protection<br />
Green work shall be protected from rain by a suitable covering. The work shall also be suitably<br />
protected from damage, mortar dropping and rain during construction.<br />
7. CEMENT POINTING<br />
The joints of masonry shall be raked at least 12 mm deep for burnt clay bricks and 6<br />
mm deep for concrete block whilst the mortar is green and not later than 48 hours of time of lying.<br />
The dust shall then be brushed out of the joints and the wall, washed with water.<br />
The mortar shall be of specified mix. Mortar shall be filled into joints and well pressed with special<br />
steel trowels. The joints shall not be touched again after it has once begun to set. The joints of the<br />
pointed work shall be neat. The lines shall be regular and uniform in breadth and the joints shall be<br />
raised, flat, sunk or "V" as may be directed. No false joints shall be allowed. The work shall be kept<br />
wet for a week after the pointing is <strong>com</strong>plete. Whenever colored pointing has to be done, the<br />
colouring pigment of the colour required shall be added to cement in such proportion as<br />
re<strong>com</strong>mended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.<br />
8 Damp-Proof Course<br />
Unless otherwise specified, damp-proof course shall be minimum 40 mm thick cement concrete of<br />
grade 1:11/2:3 by weight using 10 mm and down graded coarse aggregate, with admixture of a<br />
water-proofing <strong>com</strong>pound as approved by the COMPANY. The percentage of admixture shall be<br />
as per manufacturer's <strong>specification</strong> but not less than 2% by weight of cement. The top surface<br />
shall be double check and cured by pending for seven days.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0003 Page 16 of 16
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
1. SCOPE<br />
This <strong>specification</strong> covers plaster work for both interior and exterior surfaces of masonry and<br />
concrete.<br />
2. Materials<br />
Cement and water shall be as specified in <strong>specification</strong>s for concrete works.<br />
Sand for plastering and pointing shall conform to IS 1542. Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and<br />
free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain any appreciable amount of<br />
silt, clay balls or pallets. Sand shall not contain impurities such as iron pyrites, coal particles,<br />
lignite, mica shale etc.<br />
Fine sand shall be obtained from river beds not affected by tidal water of the sea and shall be<br />
clean, sharp and free from excessive deleterious matter. The sand shall not contain more than 8<br />
percent of mud and silt as determined by field test with a measuring cylinder.<br />
3. BASIC REQUIREMENT<br />
3.1 Texture Finish shall be applied with CM 1:3. Ornamental treatment in the form of horizontal or<br />
vertical rib texture, fan texture shall be applied by means of suitable tools to freshly applied<br />
plastered surface, as approved by Engineer-in-charge.<br />
3.2 SCAFFOLDING<br />
Only steel scaffolding shall be used. Scaffolding shall be properly planned and designed by the<br />
CONTRACTOR. It shall be approved by Engineer-In-Charge before <strong>com</strong>mencement of work.<br />
Double scaffolding, sufficiently strong so as to withstand all loads likely to <strong>com</strong>e upon it and having<br />
two sets of vertical supports, shall be provided. Where two sets of supports are not possible, the<br />
inner end of the horizontal scaffolding member shall rest in a hole provided in the header course<br />
only. Only one header for each member shall be left out. Such holes shall be filled up immediately<br />
after removal of scaffolding.<br />
For internal plastering, scaffolding shall be erected independent of walls. No member of scaffolding<br />
shall be allowed to be housed in the walls being treated with plaster. Scaffolding for external<br />
plaster shall be supported independent of walls as far as possible to avoid patchy appearance.<br />
The following measures shall be considered while designing and erecting of scaffolding.<br />
(a)<br />
(b)<br />
(c)<br />
(d)<br />
(e)<br />
(f)<br />
Sufficient sills or under pinning in addition to base plates shall be provided particularly<br />
where scaffoldings are erected on soft grounds.<br />
Adjustable bases to <strong>com</strong>pensate for uneven ground shall be used.<br />
Proper anchoring of the scaffolding/ staging at reasonable intervals shall be provided in<br />
each case with the main structure, wherever available.<br />
Horizontal braces shall be provided to prevent the scaffolding from rocking.<br />
Diagonal braces shall be provided continuously from bottom to top between two adjacent<br />
rows of uprights.<br />
The scaffolding shall be checked at every stage for plumb line.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004 Page 2 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
(g)<br />
(h)<br />
All nuts and bolts shall be properly tightened.<br />
Wherever steel tubes are used care shall be taken that all the clamps/ couplings are firmly<br />
tightened so as to avoid any slippage.<br />
3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES<br />
The surfaces shall be cleaned off all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae, oil,<br />
efflorescence and other foreign matter by wire brushing, hacking, chiseling, etc. If the Engineer-In-<br />
Charge is not satisfied with the roughening achieved by these methods, he may order other<br />
methods such as washing with acid etc.<br />
Joints shall be raked to a depth of 10mm minimum. Care shall be taken, not to damage masonry<br />
edges while raking.<br />
All surfaces of concrete, old plaster and masonry shall be roughened sufficiently for bond.<br />
Soft or crumbling masonry work and other surfaces shall be dismantled and remade if required as<br />
per instructions of Engineer-In-Charge.<br />
In case of concrete work, projecting burrs of mortar formed due to the gaps of joints in shuttering<br />
shall be removed. Such surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. The surface shall be<br />
marked with a pointed tool at spacing of not more than 50mm centers. The marks shall not be less<br />
than 3mm deep to ensure a proper key for the plaster.<br />
All surfaces to be plastered shall be thoroughly wetted for 24 hours before <strong>com</strong>mencing plaster<br />
and shall be kept damp during the progress of work. Wetting shall be uniform and shall be ensured<br />
by damping evenly.<br />
To avoid cracks at the junction of concrete with masonry work, the plaster shall be reinforced at<br />
such junctions by fixing standard wire mesh IRCS-6 (6 x 6 x 6/6) as directed by the Engineer-In-<br />
Charge. The wire mesh shall overlap concrete and masonry surface by at least 50mm.<br />
The preparation of surfaces shall be inspected by the Engineer-In-Charge. Plastering shall not be<br />
<strong>com</strong>menced, until the preparation of surfaces is approved by the Engineer-In-charge.<br />
4. CEMENT PLASTER<br />
4.1 General<br />
Cement mortar shall be prepared by mixing cement, sand and water in specified proportions. The<br />
mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it has begun to set and in any<br />
case within 30 minutes after the water is added to the dry mixtures. Mortar unused for more than<br />
30 minutes shall be rejected and removed from the site of work.<br />
4.2 Proportioning<br />
The unit of measurement for cement shall be a bag of cement weighing 50 Kgs and this shall be<br />
taken as 0.035 cubic meter (M3). Sand in specified proportion shall be measured in boxes of<br />
suitable size. It shall be measured on the basis of its dry volume. In case of damp sand its quantity<br />
shall be increased suitably to allow for bulkage.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004 Page 3 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
4.3 Mixing<br />
The mixing of mortar shall be done in mechanical mixer operated manually or by power. The<br />
Engineer-In-Charge may, however, relax these conditions at his discretion, taking into account<br />
the nature and location of work, practicability of the use of these machines. For items, where the<br />
mixers are not to be used, the CONTRACTOR shall take the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge<br />
before the <strong>com</strong>mencement of work.<br />
4.3.1 Mixing in Mechanical Mixer<br />
Cement and sand in specified proportions shall be mixed dry thoroughly in a mixer. Water shall<br />
then be added gradually and wet mixing continued for at least one minute. Care shall be taken<br />
not to add more water than that which shall bring the mortar to the consistency of a stiff paste.<br />
Only the quantity of mortar which can be used within 30 minutes of its mixing shall be prepared at<br />
a time.<br />
Mixer shall be cleaned with water each time before suspending the work.<br />
4.3.2 Hand Mixing<br />
The measured quantity of sand shall be leveled on clean water tight platform and cement bags<br />
emptied on top. The cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed dry by being turned over and<br />
over, backward and forward, several times till the mixture is of a uniform colour. The quantity of dry<br />
mix which can be used within 30 minutes shall then be mixed with just sufficient quantity of water<br />
to bring the mortar to the consistency of a stiff paste.<br />
5. CEMENT PLASTER WITH WATERPROOFING COMPOUND<br />
Water proofing <strong>com</strong>pound shall conform to IS 2645 (CICO or approved equivalent). The <strong>com</strong>pound<br />
shall be well mixed with dry cement in the proportion of 2% by weight or as re<strong>com</strong>mended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
6. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS<br />
For external plaster, the plastering operations shall be started from the top floor and carried<br />
downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering may be started wherever the building frame,<br />
roofing, and brick work are ready.<br />
The first under layer shall be applied to ceilings. After the ceiling plaster is <strong>com</strong>plete,<br />
plastering on walls shall be started.<br />
7. SAND FACED PLASTER (18 mm thick)<br />
First coat<br />
The first coat shall be 12mm thick of 1:4, cement-sand proportion by volume. Guide stripes 150mm<br />
wide and of suitable length shall be first put up on the surface for the first coat. These guide strips<br />
shall be brought to absolutely plumb vertically and to the same plane horizontally all through.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004 Page 4 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
These guide strips shall be put up sufficiently earlier, so that at the <strong>com</strong>mencement of plaster,<br />
these guide strips shall have sufficiently hardened. The plastered surface then shall be firmly<br />
pressed to a uniform plumb and plane. The surface shall then be sufficiently scratched to receive<br />
the second coat. The surface of the first coat shall be thoroughly <strong>com</strong>bed, so that 5mm deep<br />
grooves at 12mm apart are formed, when the mortar is in the plastic stage. The surface shall be<br />
cured for at least 3 days.<br />
Second coat<br />
Sand used for the second coat shall be sieved. Sand passing through 3mm sieve shall be used.<br />
The sand shall be of uniform size.<br />
The second coat shall be 6mm thick of 1:4, cement sand proportion by volume. The second coat<br />
shall be struck uniformly over the first scratched coat and firmly pressed and leveled using a<br />
batten. The surface shall than be firmly trowelled and sponge floated to remove excess moisture<br />
and to bring the sand to the surface.<br />
A sponge dipped in cement water shall be used with circular motion to get the sandy appearance.<br />
The surface thus prepared shall be uniformly roughened for texture by running a fine wire brush<br />
lightly over the surface, as per the instructions of Engineer-In-Charge.<br />
The surface of the plaster shall be kept moist, for a minimum period of 7 days and shall be<br />
protected from sun rays.<br />
8. SMOOTH FINISHED CEMENT PLASTER<br />
The preparatory work shall be similar to as described above, except for the following.<br />
Single Coat Plaster<br />
The first coat shall be 1:6 cement sand proportion by volume and of the following<br />
thickness:<br />
12mm thick overall plaster<br />
6mm thick overall ceiling plaster<br />
Double Coat Plaster<br />
First coat<br />
The first coat shall be 1:6 cement sand proportion by volume and of the following<br />
thickness:<br />
12mm for 18mm thick overall plaster<br />
9. GYPSUM PUNNING<br />
Material shall be as approved by Engineer-in charge.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004 Page 5 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
Work involves roughen plastered surface with light wire brush, taking care to see that the plaster<br />
does not fall off during such roughening operation.<br />
Applying plaster of Gypsum in two coats having thickness of 8 mm each.<br />
Smoothening the surface with trowel to obtain a uniform surface without any waves.<br />
Permissible variations in final level of plaster: + 1 mm per meter in vertical plane.<br />
All undulations in final level of plaster shall be checked with straight edge, spirit level and line<br />
strings (stretched).<br />
Any undulations exceeding permissible limits shall be rectified by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.<br />
Any hollowed plaster detected by tapping shall be rectified by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.<br />
10. DAMAGE RECTIFICATION<br />
Any cracks, damages, any part of work which sound hollow when tapped or found damaged or<br />
defective otherwise shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by Engineer-In-<br />
Charge at no extra cost.<br />
11. POINTING<br />
Surface Preparation<br />
The joints of the masonry either brick stone or laterite to be flat pointed shall be raked to a depth of<br />
at least 12mm. Raking shall be done carefully and on no account shall any chipping of the<br />
masonry be permitted. In new work the raking out shall be done when the mortar in the joint is still<br />
green and fresh.<br />
Before pointing is <strong>com</strong>menced, the whole raked surface shall be properly cleaned with wire<br />
brushes, washed with water and kept well wetted.<br />
Application<br />
Unless stated otherwise, the mix for pointing shall be of 1:2 (cement – sand) proportions. It shall<br />
be properly worked with sufficient water to produce a smooth paste.<br />
The mix shall be pushed into the joints and superfluous mortar properly removed with a trowel.<br />
The pointing lines shall be regular and uniform in breadth and shall be finished flush, raised etc as<br />
specified.<br />
The edges of the pointing shall be cut off parallel so as to leave well defined lines.<br />
In recessed pointing, the mortar shall be struck off, with a trowel and the work left, showing the<br />
natural irregularities, in line and surface of the stones themselves.<br />
In case of raised pointing, it shall project from the wall facing with its edges cut parallel, so as to<br />
have a uniformly raised band of about 6mm and width 10mm or more as directed, showing the<br />
natural irregularities in line and surface of stones themselves.<br />
The pointing shall be kept wet for 7 days or as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004 Page 6 of 7
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTER WORK<br />
12. CURING<br />
All plaster and mortar works shall be kept damp continuously for a minimum period of 7 days after<br />
the application of the final coat.<br />
Curing shall <strong>com</strong>mence, 24 hours after the plaster is laid.<br />
To prevent excessive evaporation on the sunny or windowed sides of buildings in hot dry weather,<br />
matting or gunny bags shall be hung over the outside of the plaster and kept moist.<br />
In case the plaster/mortar cracks through neglect of watering or any other fault of CONTRACTOR,<br />
the plaster shall be removed and redone at his cost.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0004 Page 7 of 7
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOFING AND SIDING WORK<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0006<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOFING AND<br />
SIDING WORK<br />
1. SCOPE<br />
The work covered by this <strong>specification</strong> shall consist of installing roofing and providing all materials,<br />
labour and equipment necessary to <strong>com</strong>plete the work in strict accordance with drawings.<br />
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS<br />
2.1 Codes & Standards<br />
All work shall conform to the latest requirements of Indian Standards as listed below.<br />
IS 277-1992 : Galvanized steel sheets (Plain and corrugated).<br />
IS 513-1994 : Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips.<br />
IS 730-1978 : Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing.<br />
IS 1728-1960<br />
:<br />
Specification for sheet metal rain water pipes upto 100mm<br />
Nominal size, gutters, fitting, accessories.<br />
IS 2629-1985 : Re<strong>com</strong>mended Practice for hot dip galvanizing on iron and steel.<br />
IS 2858-1984 : Code of Practice for roofing with Mangalore tiles.<br />
IS 3978- 1993 :<br />
IS 6745-1972<br />
:<br />
IS 13229-1991 : Zinc for galvanizing.<br />
Code of Practice for manufacture of burnt clay Mangalore pattern<br />
roofing tiles.<br />
Methods for determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc coated<br />
iron and steel articles.<br />
2.2 Other Standards / Specifications<br />
Specification for Structural Steel Work<br />
Conflict, if any, between this <strong>specification</strong> and related <strong>specification</strong>s, standards and documents<br />
shall be referred to the Engineer for resolution before proceeding with the work.<br />
3. ROOFING<br />
3.1 General<br />
The roof slope shall be as specified and in general not pitched flatter then 1:6. Materials shall be<br />
supplied by approved manufacturer. The items supplied shall be free from cracks, chipped edges<br />
or corners or other damages. Storage and safety precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to<br />
the accessories.<br />
3.2 Materials<br />
i. Corrugated GI Sheet, Ridges, Hips, Valleys, Flashings and Gullets<br />
GI sheets shall be of specified thickness and of class-3 galvanized as per IS: 277 and shall be<br />
bent to the required shape and dimensions as per drawings without damaging the sheet in the<br />
process of bending<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0006 Page 2 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOFING AND<br />
SIDING WORK<br />
ii.<br />
Wind Ties<br />
Wind ties of MS flats shall be of specified size subjected to minimum size of 40 mm x 6 mm.<br />
Corrugated<br />
Non Asbestos Cement (AC) Sheet Roofing/Cladding<br />
iii. Asbestos Cement Sheets<br />
These shall be of specified thickness and as per IS:459 and shall be of approved brand.<br />
iv. Ridges and Hips<br />
These shall be of the same thickness of CGl sheets as specified. The type of ridges shall be<br />
suitable to the type of sheets used and location.<br />
v. Other Accessories<br />
Accessories such as flashing pieces, caves filler pieces, northlight and ventilator curves,<br />
barge boards etc. shall be of approved brand and shall be suitable to the location of items as<br />
specified.<br />
3.3 Workmanship<br />
3.3.1 Corrugated GI Sheet Roofing<br />
i. Spacing of Purlins<br />
One Purlin (each) shall be provided at the ridge and the eaves. Spacing of the purlins<br />
shall be as specified. Purlins shall coincide with the centerline of the end lap. Ridge purlins shall<br />
be placed such that ridges can be placed properly. Portion overhanging the wall support should<br />
not be more than one-fourth the purlins spacing.<br />
ii.<br />
Finish for Purlins<br />
The top surfaces of the purlins shall be painted before fixing the sheets and the embedded portion<br />
shall be finished with two coats of coal tar<br />
iii. Laying of Sheets<br />
Sheets shall be laid on the purlins to a true plane with the lines of corrugation truly parallel or<br />
normal to the sides of area to be covered unless otherwise specified. They shall be bent up along<br />
their side edges close to the wall and the junction shall be protected by flashing on projecting drip<br />
course as specified.<br />
iv. Laps<br />
End laps shall be 150 mm for 1:2 slope and 200 mm for flatter ones. Side lap shall be of two ridges<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0006 Page 3 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOFING AND<br />
SIDING WORK<br />
of corrugations on each side,<br />
v. Cutting of sheet<br />
Sheets shall be cut according to the dimensions and as specified as per drawings. Sheets shall be<br />
cut with a straight edge and chisel to give a straight finish.<br />
vi. Fixing of Sheets<br />
The sheets shall be fixed to the roof members with J or L polymer coated bolts, polymer cap, seal<br />
washer and thrust washer. The bolts shall be long enough to project at least 12 mm above the top<br />
of their nuts. The grip of J or L hook bolts on the side of purlins shall not be less than 25 mm.<br />
There shall be at least three hook bolts placed at the ridges of corrugations in each sheet in every<br />
purlin and their spacing shall not exceed 300 mm. Sheets shall be joined together at side laps by<br />
polymer coated bolts and nuts as specified, each bolt shall be with a polymer cap (grease<br />
filled) seal washer and polymer coated thrust washer. Bolt shall be placed zig zag on<br />
overlapping corrugations. The spacing of the beam bolts shall not exceed 600 mm in each of the<br />
staggered rows.<br />
vii. Holes<br />
Holes for all bolts shall be drilled in the ridges of the corrugations from the underside before<br />
placing in position. The holes in the sheet shall be at least 50 mm from the edge. These holes in<br />
the washers shall<br />
be of diameter of the hook bolts or the seam bolts. The nuts shall be tightened from above to give<br />
a leak proof roof.<br />
viii. Ridges and Hips<br />
The overlap for ridges and hips on either side of CGI sheet and end lees shall be at least 225 ruin,<br />
Ridges<br />
& hips shall be fixed to the purlins with polymer coated hook bolts, thrust washer and polymer cap.<br />
At least one of the fixing bolts shall pass through the end laps of ridges and hips on either side. If it<br />
is not possible extra hook bolts shall be provided. Each end lap of ridges and hips shall be joined<br />
together by at least galvanized iron seam bolts and GI washers.<br />
Ridges and hips shall fit squarely on the sheets<br />
ix. Valleys and Flashings<br />
The edge, wherever the roof sheeting or valley gutter is turned up against a wall shall be made<br />
weather proof with flashing. Flashing shall be bent to shape and fixed as specified. Lap over the<br />
sheet shall be minimum 150 mm. End laps between flashing sheets shall not be less than 225 mm.<br />
Flashing shall be inserted into brickwork or masonry joints to a depth of 50 mm and shall be filled<br />
with<br />
cement mortar (1:3). When flashing has to be laid at a slope, it shall be stepped at each<br />
course of masonry. The steps shall be cut back at an angle of at least 300.<br />
Valleys shall be bent to shape and shall have at least 225 mm end lap and projection on either<br />
side under CGI sheet. Valleys shall be fixed to the roof members below with polymer coated GI<br />
bolts, polymer cap, seal washer and polymer coated thrust washer. At least one fixing bolt shall<br />
pass through end laps of the valley piece.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0006 Page 4 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOFING AND<br />
SIDING WORK<br />
x. Gutters<br />
The longitudinal edges shall be turned back by 12 mm and heater) to form a rounded edge. The<br />
ends of the sheet at junctions of pieces shall be hooked into each other and beaten flush to avoid<br />
leakage.<br />
Gutters shall be laid to minimum 1:120 slope. Gutters shall be true to line and slope and<br />
shall be supported by brackets as specified.<br />
xi. Wind Ties<br />
Wind ties shall be of 40 mm x 6 mm flat iron section and other size as specified. These shall be<br />
fixed at the two eaves end of the sheet. Fixing shall be done with the same loose bolts, which<br />
secure sheets to the purlins. Slot holes shall be cut in the wind ties to allow for temperature<br />
variations.<br />
3.3.2 Precoated Galvanised steel Sheet Roofing/Cladding<br />
i. Material<br />
The base metal of the roofing shall be Cold Rolled Steel Sheet conforming to IS-513. It<br />
shall be galvanized by Hot-dip process as per IS-277. The bottom unexposed surface shall then<br />
be coated with alkyd backer of minimum 7 microns, Top exposed surface shall have epoxy primer<br />
of minimum 5 microns followed by polyester top coat of minimum 20 microns of specified colour.<br />
ii.<br />
Properties<br />
The precoated galvanized steel standards<br />
Pencil Hardness : H-2H<br />
Formability : 2-3 t<br />
Impact Resistance : 40”/IB<br />
Salt spray test : 750 hours<br />
QUV-Wealterometer Test : 1000 hours<br />
Humidity Test : 1000 hours<br />
Temperature Resistance : 1500C<br />
Fire performance : Class - I<br />
The free overhang of the sheets at the eaves shall be as per manufacturer’s catalogue.<br />
iii. Profile<br />
The profiles shall have a depth of not less than 30 mm and pitch of 198 mm. Overall sheet<br />
thickness shall be 0.60 mm minimum weight shall be 5.24 kg/Sq.M.<br />
iv. Accessories<br />
All roofing accessories like ridge, gutters, north light curves, lovers for roof monitors, etc.<br />
shall be fabricated out the approved pre-coated sheet as per drawing. Metallic Fasteners and<br />
Fixing accessories shall be corrosion proof. Non metallic fasteners shall be of neoprene. Sealants<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0006 Page 5 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROOFING AND<br />
SIDING WORK<br />
shall be neutral cure type and cold setting variety.<br />
3.3.3 Precoated Galvalume Sheet Roofing/Cladding<br />
i. Material<br />
The base metal of the roofing shall be Cold Rolled Steel ASTM A446 Grade E having yield<br />
stress of 550 MPa. The alloy coating <strong>com</strong>prises of 55% aluminum, 43.5% zinc and 1.5% silicon<br />
with coating class AZ 150 (150 gm/m2 minimum coating mass).<br />
Minimum Thickness of sheet shall be 0.5mm without coating and 0.58mm with coating.<br />
ii.<br />
Properties<br />
The precoated galvanized steel standards<br />
Pencil Hardness : H-2H<br />
Formability : 2-3 t<br />
Impact Resistance : 40”/IB<br />
Salt spray test : 750 hours<br />
QUV-Wealterometer Test : 1000 hours<br />
Humidity Test : 1000 hours<br />
Temperature Resistance : 1500C<br />
Fire performance : Class - I<br />
The free overhang of the sheets at the eaves shall be as per manufacturer’s catalogue.<br />
iii. Profile<br />
Cladding sheets shall have an effective cover width of 406mm with ribs of approximately 41mm<br />
height spaced at 203mm between rib centers. The sheets should be installed with <strong>com</strong>patible<br />
proprietary interlocking clips, which lock over the male rib. The clip should lock firmly into the<br />
underside of the center and female ribs and should be fastened to supports with wafer-head self<br />
drilling zinc coated fasteners. The clips shall be concealed and fasteners are to penetrate the<br />
cladding.<br />
iv. Accessories<br />
All roofing accessories like ridge, gutters, north light curves, lovers for roof monitors, etc.<br />
shall be fabricated out the same material as that of roof/ cladding. Metallic Fasteners and Fixing<br />
accessories shall be corrosion proof. Non metallic fasteners shall be of neoprene. Sealants shall<br />
be neutral cure type and cold setting variety.<br />
4. MEASUREMENT OF WORK<br />
Measurement shall be on covered area of sheet. Laps shall not be measured separately. Work<br />
shall be inclusive of providing accessories such as capping, flashing, ridge piece, fixing bolts, etc.<br />
Eaves/Ridge gutter & rain water pipes shall be paid separately.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0006 Page 6 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRAINS<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0009<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRAINS<br />
1.0 SCOPE<br />
The work covered under this <strong>specification</strong> consists of providing labour, materials, tools, plant<br />
equipment necessary for the proper execution and installation of drains and sewers in strict<br />
accordance with this <strong>specification</strong>, and applicable drawings. The work includes Sanitary<br />
Drains & Process Waste Drains<br />
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
The general arrangement of drainage and the related work shall be as detailed in the relevant<br />
drawings. If actual field conditions or any other reasons necessitate any modifications to the<br />
arrangements detailed in the drawings, the contractor shall prepare detailed report and sketches<br />
showing such proposed modifications for the approval of the Owner / Consultant, prior to the<br />
<strong>com</strong>mencement of work.<br />
The contractor shall carefully examine all the related drawings, sketches, <strong>specification</strong>s, and shall<br />
be responsible for proper installation of these works in best workmanlike manner. The contractor<br />
shall be responsible for the provisions of all the materials and fittings which shall form the part of<br />
the installation work, and these shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant prior to the<br />
<strong>com</strong>mencement of the work.<br />
The contractor shall submit any technical literature and other information regarding the materials<br />
whenever called for. The contractor shall investigate all the actual site conditions and other details<br />
affecting the planning and execution of the works, and shall arrange the timely procurement of all<br />
the materials and plant and workmanship to meet such conditions as required for t he <strong>com</strong>pletion<br />
of the work as scheduled.<br />
Dismantling of any existing work shall be undertaken by the contractor only on the written<br />
permission by the Owner / Consultants. Damages to the existing construction and installation other<br />
than those to be dismantled and caused as a result of the contractor doing dismantling work, or as<br />
a result of his opening trenches for drainage works, shall be made good by him by employing<br />
skilled tradesmen for such repairs. The contractor shall take all the precautions to avoid any<br />
damages to the existing construction and / or installations.<br />
3.1 DRAINS<br />
3.1.1 Drains and / or sewers shall be laid to the alignment and grades as shown on the drawings,<br />
subject to any modifications done from time to time to meet the requirements of the works.<br />
No deviations from the lines, depths of cuttings, gradient of drains or sewers shall be permitted<br />
except on the specific permission from the Owner / Consultant. Before <strong>com</strong>mencement of work,<br />
accurate surveys and levels of the grade shall be recorded. The excavation and filling as required<br />
on this grade for the purpose of laying drainage shall be measured on the basis of such records.<br />
The levels and surveys shall be based on the benchmarks and reference points decided by the<br />
Owner / Consultant. Any instruments and technical assistance, manpower, required for such<br />
surveys and levels shall be made available whenever required. The materials required for<br />
preparation of benchmarks, pegs, pillars shall be furnished by the Contractor.<br />
3.1.2 Setting out drainage : Setting out of drainage shall conform to approved drawings and shall<br />
be set out with the aid suitable bearing rods and site rails at intervals not more than 15 metres.<br />
Necessary materials for bearing rods and site rails and the instruments required for setting out and<br />
fixing such demarcations and reference points shall be provided by the contractor when checking<br />
is undertaken. All site rails and posts shall be of well-seasoned timber and such sizes as would be<br />
required for proper stability. The wooden members used for such purposes shall be planed and no<br />
warped or defective material be used. The posts shall be kept sufficiently away from the edge of<br />
trenches and shall be properly embedded in concrete. Site rails shall be fixed to these posts by<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0009 Page 2 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRAINS<br />
any approved means so that the same do not get disturbed. The centre lines shall be accurately<br />
marked on the site rails either by saw cut or paint marks. At any time, at least 4 site rails shall be<br />
kept at correct level, and alignment along the centre line of drainage lines. Any additional site rails<br />
wherever required shall be provided as and when directed. The proper maintenance of the site<br />
rails shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The checking of levels and other marks on the<br />
site rails shall be done at least once a day. The number of site rails and posts, their tiers material,<br />
mode of securing site rails to posts, tiers, sizes of timber to be used for site rails and bearing rods<br />
shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant prior to use.<br />
3.1.3 Excavation<br />
The excavation for drainage lines shall be open -cut unless otherwise necessary. The excavated<br />
soil shall be stacked at locations approved by the Owner / Consultants, and shall be removed<br />
beyond specified lead and brought back for back-fill whenever necessary. Necessary traffic<br />
diversions, barriers on the trenches, danger signals, watch and ward shall be provided by the<br />
contractor at his own cost. Dimensions of excavations shall be approved by the Owner /<br />
Consultant in advance and at no time the trench be excavated more than 20 metres or the<br />
distance between 2 successive manholes, whichever is less. The least distance to which the<br />
trench is excavated to full depth shall be five metres at a time.<br />
It will be the responsibility of the contractor to clean the site off the shrubs, grass, soil tree roots,<br />
stumps and other burdens. The excavated soil shall be sprinkled with water to avoid dust<br />
nuisance. The contractor shall utilise minimum width of the roads if the drainage work is by the<br />
side and / or within the road so that no obstruction is created to usual traffic. Wherever necessary,<br />
the excavation shall be done deeper than required and the depth so made shall be filled with<br />
concrete or any other approved material to required level. Such cases, however, shall be dealt with<br />
only when permitted by the Owner / Consultant in writing.<br />
The sides of excavation shall be supported effectively by means such as timbering, sheet piling,<br />
which shall be closely joined in all loose or sandy strata and below sub -soil water level. Any such<br />
temporary supports shall be removed when work is <strong>com</strong>pleted unless otherwise specifically called<br />
for. In soft or waterlogged areas, timbering shall be done with tongue and grove joint and shall be<br />
close driven to such depths below bed levels as ordered by the Owner / Consultants. The<br />
timbering shall be done out of adequate section of wooden members, and shall be fully braced and<br />
strutted to avoid any falls, side slips, subsidence and all cavities shall be solidly filled-in. The<br />
contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of all timbering, bracing, sheet piling, strutting,<br />
and repair for all damages to the property and surroundings due to improper quality, strengths,<br />
placement, stability of the existing foundations shall be done by the Contractor, wherever<br />
necessary at his own cost. The responsibility due to improper shoring shall rest with the contractor.<br />
At all times, during the progress of works, the contractor shall keep the trenches and excavated<br />
pits free of water which shall be drained in the most harmless manner. The contractor shall provide<br />
all the materials, plant, labour, fuel and other necessities for dewatering of trenches in the manner<br />
best suited to the particular condition. Any damages to surrounding structures and / or foundations<br />
due to improper dewatering shall be to the Contractor's account.<br />
In addition to the necessities of proper excavation described above, all necessary precautions for<br />
the safety of persons and structures shall be taken by the contractor.<br />
3.1.4 Back-fill, consolidation & removal of surplus earth<br />
After the drainage lines are constructed and tested, as per requirements, the trenches shall be<br />
backfilled in such a manner that it would avoid damages to the line laid. The back-filling shall be<br />
done in layers of 150 mm thick selected earth / sand / murrum shall be properly watered and<br />
consolidated. The strutting and timbering shall be removed gradually to avoid side collapses.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0009 Page 3 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRAINS<br />
3.1.5 Laying & jointing of RCC pipes for drains<br />
Materials shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. Materials shall be approved by Owner /<br />
Consultants prior to placement of the same. RCC pipes shall conform to IS:458. Pipes shall be laid<br />
on concrete bed or cradles, if necessary. Pipes shall be lowered gradually in trenches without<br />
causing damage to trenches and bed concrete / cradles. Extra earth at joints shall be scooped out<br />
to ac<strong>com</strong>modate the collar. Pipes shall be laid to required levels and alignments throughout the<br />
length. In case pipes are laid on cradles, the underside of pipes shall be grouted with cement<br />
slurry and clean fine sand to avoid gaps and foreign materials prior to placement of pipes. Cradles<br />
shall be cured sufficiently prior to lowering of pipes and any damages caused to the same while<br />
lowering pipes shall be made good by the contractor.<br />
Joints shall be made by using Standard Collars which shall have rough surface inside to have<br />
proper grip. The jointing material shall be cement mortar in proportion 1:2. Prior to sealing of joints,<br />
the joints shall be caulked with tarred hemp. The joints shall be finished with cement paste laid at<br />
45 deg angle to the length, and shall be finished all round the periphery of the pipe. The interior of<br />
the pipes shall be cleaned off prior to testing of the drainage lines. In case of pipe with socket and<br />
spigot, the joint should be made with rubber ring conforming to IS:5382. The joints shall be<br />
sufficiently cured and the drains shall be tested under a head of at least 2 metres of water above<br />
the crown of pipes. A strong approved colour shall be added to the water for testing. The defective<br />
pipes shall be replaced by good ones. All defective joints shall be made good by cutting and<br />
redoing. The joints where leakage persists shall be encased in P.C.C. 1:2:4 at the cost of the<br />
contractor whenever permitted. The size of such encasement shall be decided by the Owner /<br />
Consultants. The test for leakage shall be conducted at least for an hour after application of water<br />
head.<br />
3.2 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS, ETC.<br />
The manholes and chambers shall be constructed at locations and as detailed on drawings.<br />
Additional manholes and / or junctions chambers shall be constructed whenever required and as<br />
instructed by Owner / Consultant.<br />
3.2.1 Construction of Manholes / Chambers<br />
Construction of manholes shall be as described below unless otherwise stated elsewhere.<br />
i) Floor shall be in PCC 1:3:6 concrete.<br />
ii) Side walls shall be in brick or concrete block or concrete.<br />
iii) Bending shall be done in concrete screed and shall be finished smooth in cement rendering the<br />
shape and curvature shall be best suited to the inlet and outlet pipes, and no sharp bends shall be<br />
given.<br />
iv) Relieving arches in the brickwork shall be around pipes.<br />
v) All M.S. rungs, ladders, as required shall be provided. The rungs shall be firmly anchored in<br />
walls and painted with anticorrosive paint.<br />
vi) Foundations and sidewalls shall be in RCC whenever required. The RCC work under such<br />
circumstances shall be governed by relevant <strong>specification</strong>s.<br />
vii) The manhole cover shall conform to the relevant standards and shall be embedded in PCC<br />
coping.<br />
viii) Inside and outside surface of the manhole / chamber shall be plastered in C.M. 1:4 rendered<br />
smooth, outside surface shall also be plastered similarly whenever called for. (Inside shall be with<br />
water proofing <strong>com</strong>pound).<br />
3.2.2 Brickwork<br />
Bricks shall be of good quality and of homogeneous texture, free from flaws, cracks, stone,<br />
nodules of lime and such undesirable defects. The bricks shall be of uniform size and shall not be<br />
over burnt.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0009 Page 4 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRAINS<br />
The bricks shall be well-soaked in water prior to use. Joints shall not be more than 10 mm thick,<br />
not more than 10 courses shall be raised in a day which shall be raised uniformly. Cement mortar<br />
of 1:6 shall be used unless otherwise stated. All the joints shall be raked to 12 mm depths prior to<br />
receiving of plaster. All the inserts shall be firmly grouted prior to plaster.<br />
3.2.3 Plaster<br />
Sand and cement shall be clean and of the best quality. The same should be free from clay and<br />
any other inorganic or organic impurities. Mixing shall be done to required proportions on hard<br />
platforms. Materials shall be first dry mixed and water added later to achieve required condition.<br />
Use of mortar which has started setting shall not be permitted. Such mortar shall be removed from<br />
site. Surfaces to be plastered shall be soaked in water 24 hours in advance. First coat of plaster<br />
shall be applied to have even surface and the coat of cement rendering (of 2mm thick) shall be<br />
applied over the first coat in row. The second coat shall be pressed finished smooth with trowel.<br />
External plaster shall be done in the same manner. Plaster shall be cured for at least seven days.<br />
Concrete shall be in proportion specified. The aggregate shall be clean and graded. The cast iron<br />
covers shall be of duty specified and shall conform to relevant standards. They shall be of best<br />
quality foundry grey iron metal, close g rained, tough without flaws, blister and all other casting<br />
defects. They shall have smooth surface, and shall be placed in PCC coping to level and shall be<br />
even. All the frames and inserts such as rungs shall receive two coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic<br />
paint, one prior to placement and the other after fixing the same in position.<br />
The manholes shall be made watertight by proper plastering inside and outside. The manholes<br />
shall be tested along with the main drainage lines. During testing the external surface shall be<br />
checked for visible leakages. The leakages so found shall be corrected. On <strong>com</strong>pletion of the<br />
testing for leakages outside, the trenches by the side of the manholes shall be filled in and the<br />
excavated pit of the manhole shall be flooded with water for testing the leakage from outside to<br />
inside. The particular testing shall be done whenever called for and the leakage so observed shall<br />
be repaired.<br />
3.3 STONEWARE PIPES<br />
3.3.1 Materials<br />
The materials shall conform to IS -3006. They shall be of best quality stoneware, salt glazed,<br />
thoroughly burnt through the whole length and thickness, free from air-holes, fire blisters, cracks<br />
and other blemishes. They shall be of close and even texture. The manufacturer of the same shall<br />
be approved by the Owner / Consultants prior to the procurement of these pipes. The pipe shall be<br />
stacked at approved locations and protected against all damage. All the pipes shall be close fitted<br />
and shall be tested before lowering them into trenches. Barrels, spigots and sockets shall be<br />
cleaned, scraped and brushed.<br />
3.3.2 Laying<br />
The pipes shall be carefully and gradually lowered into the trenches and shall be laid to correct line<br />
level, and to the gradient as shown on the drawings. The laying shall generally conform to IS -<br />
1742. Care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter getting inside the pipes while lowering.<br />
The pipe lines between the successive manholes shall be without any undulation horizontally and<br />
vertically. These pipes shall be laid, sockets facing up the gradient beginning at the lower end up<br />
and all sockets laid to levels in the holes or scoops out for the purposes. Each pipe shall be<br />
brought up to placement one at a time.<br />
3.3.3 Jointing<br />
This shall be done generally as stated in IS -1742. This shall be taken up only after the final<br />
alignment is made and gradients and inverts are checked by the Owner / Consultants. A gasket of<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0009 Page 5 of 6
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRAINS<br />
tarred hemp yarn shall be placed around the joint in the annular space between spigot and socket<br />
and the same shall be inserted by suitable tools and packed up properly. Additional strands of yarn<br />
shall be used if necessary. Such yarn shall be soaked in water prior to placement. Complete<br />
caulking operations with cement mortar in proportion 1:1 of cement to sand or as specified, shall<br />
be made in suitable quantities with wooden caulking tool to fill up the annular space <strong>com</strong>pletely<br />
and fully. On <strong>com</strong>pletion of sealing of the joints the same shall be struck off at 45 deg to the<br />
longitudinal axis of drain using same mortar and finishing the same by neat cement rendering.<br />
Depths of sockets yarn, mortar shall be approximately as stated below under Table I. Whenever<br />
necessary, the pipes shall have PCC concrete bedding and / or concrete encasement.<br />
Table - I<br />
Sr.No. Diameter of pipe Depth of Socket Depth of Yarn Depth of Mortar<br />
1. 100 mm 50 22 28<br />
2. 150 mm 56 28 28<br />
3. 250 mm 65 28 37<br />
4. 300 mm 75 32 43<br />
Each joint shall be adequately cured by placing wet cloth or canvas wrapped around the joint and<br />
kept wet continuously for 3 days.<br />
3.3.4 Testing<br />
After the joints are cured for at least three days, the pipeline shall be tested for leakage to water<br />
head of 2 metres. The testing shall be deemed to be satisfactory if the water level does not fall by<br />
more than 12 mm in a length of approximately 90 metres of drain pipes within a period of one hour.<br />
Upon application of test head, all the joints shall be inspected for leakages which shall be repaired<br />
and the line retested in the similar manner. After satisfactory tests of such line, the back-filling shall<br />
proceed in the similar manner described previously. For the back-filling prior permission shall be<br />
obtained from the Owner / Consultant.<br />
3.4 CAST IRON PIPE DRAINS<br />
Materials and laying of pipes and fittings shall conform to IS-1536, 1537, 1538, 3989. The pipes<br />
shall be embedded in concrete whenever necessary. The pipes shall be jointed either by cement<br />
mortar joints or by lead caulking or rubber ring as specified. Other operations such as excavation,<br />
laying, testing and backfilling shall be as described in the preceding various paragraphs.<br />
3.5 HDPE PIPE<br />
HDPE pipes shall conform to IS:4984 with pressure rating of 6 kg / sq. cm. The HDPE pipe<br />
moulded fittings shall conform to IS:8008 and fabricated fittings to IS:8360. All fittings shall be<br />
fabricated at factory under ideal conditions. The pipe shall be embedded in PCC or sand wherever<br />
necessary. Hexagonal head bolts and nuts shall be of galvanised mild steel conforming to IS:1363.<br />
The pipe shall be jointed by heated tool welding (with mirror); hot gas welding (with torch and filler<br />
rod); electro fusion. Hydro testing (at 1.5 times than working pressure) / spark testing (at 20-25 kv)<br />
shall be carried out. All butt joints of fittings shall have FRP mesh for at least 100 mm on both side<br />
of the butt joint.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0009 Page 6 of 6
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CABLE TRENCH<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0010<br />
C Issued for Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CABLE TRENCH<br />
1.0 SCOPE<br />
This <strong>specification</strong> covers requirement for construction of RCC cable Trench.<br />
2.0 Materials<br />
Cable Trench shall be of RCC having base and wall in cast-in situ concrete and cover<br />
slab shall be in pre-cast concrete.<br />
Concrete work shall be carried out as per WP <strong>specification</strong>s for concrete works.<br />
Wherever required, suitable insert plates having minimum thickness of 10mm shall be<br />
provided in side the cable trench. For protection of edge, corner angle shall be<br />
provided.<br />
3.0 Workmanship<br />
Work elements involved shall be as per <strong>specification</strong>s for concrete.<br />
For workmanship involved for steel items , refer <strong>specification</strong> for steel works. Slope<br />
shall be provided inside the cable trench so as to route rain water to neaqrest storm<br />
water drain.<br />
4.0 Pre-cast covers<br />
Pre-cast concrete covers shall be provided over wall. Covers shall be provided with MS<br />
lifting kook as indicated in drawings. Pre-cast cover shall be of maximum weight of 750<br />
kg.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0007 Page 2 of 2
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED<br />
GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY<br />
PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FENCING AND GATES<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0011<br />
D<br />
Revised & Issued for Tender<br />
SUS VYT JJW 18/08/09<br />
C Issued for Civil Tender<br />
RAR UDB AK 06/06/09<br />
B Issued for Client Review RAR UDB AK<br />
29/05/09<br />
A Issued for SDC RAR UDB AK 26/05/09<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREP CHECKED WORLEY-<br />
PARSONS<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
HPCL<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FENCING AND<br />
GATES<br />
1.0 SCOPE<br />
This <strong>specification</strong> specifies the requirements of fence and associated gate work including<br />
foundation and earthwork thereof. The height of the fence shall be approximately 2.0m to the<br />
top of the chain link fencing at the posts and approximately 2.5m in vertical height at the top<br />
line of barbed wire attached to the cranked tops of the posts unless stated otherwise.<br />
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES<br />
Note - Wherever reference is made to IS Codes, on any page of this Technical<br />
Specification (including <strong>annexure</strong>s), applicable year of publication of IS Code is<br />
as stated below.<br />
All work shall be strictly in accordance with the Technical Specifications, unless<br />
otherwise approved by the Engineer-In-Charge in writing.<br />
The Indian standard codes applicable to this section shall include but not limited to the<br />
following:<br />
IS: 432 (Part 1) : Mild steel medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire<br />
- 1982 for concrete reinforcement: Part 1 Mild steel and tensile steel<br />
bars.<br />
IS: 432 (Part 2) : Mild steel medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire<br />
- 1982 for concrete reinforcement: Part 2 Hard-drawn steel wire.<br />
IS: 456 -2000<br />
IS: 1786 - 1985<br />
IS: 278 - 1978<br />
IS: 2721 - 2003<br />
: Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.<br />
: High strength deformed steel bars and wires.<br />
: Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing.<br />
: Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric.<br />
3.0 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS<br />
Refer Standard <strong>specification</strong>s for earthwork and concrete work.<br />
4.0 CHAIN LINK FENCING<br />
4.1 Materials<br />
4.1.1 Chain Link Fencing<br />
The material requirement shall confirm to IS: 2721. The chain link fencing shall be<br />
woven from 3.15mm diameter wire with mesh size of 50mm. The mesh wire shall not<br />
vary from the specified diameter by more than +0.05mm.<br />
4.1.2 Galvanized Wires<br />
All steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanized wires and diameter of the wire shall be<br />
3.15mm. The diameter shall be measured over the galvanized coating.<br />
The line wire shall be 4mm diameter mild steel.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0011 Page 2 of 4
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FENCING AND<br />
GATES<br />
The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the concrete intermediate posts shall be<br />
2.5mm diameter mild steel.<br />
The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 1.6mm<br />
diameter mild steel.<br />
Hair pin staple for fastening down the bottom of galvanized chain line fencing to the<br />
concrete sill shall be of 3.15mm wire. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure<br />
anchorage.<br />
4.1.3 Cleats for Eye Bolts<br />
Cleats for eyebolts shall be of uniform size and shall consist of mild steel angle of<br />
65 x 65 x 6mm.<br />
4.1.4 Eye Bolt Strainers<br />
The eyebolt strainer shall consist of bolts with welded eye sufficiently threaded and fitted<br />
with a nut and washer.<br />
Two-way eyebolt strainers shall have a suitable ring nut fitted after the wires have been<br />
strained on one side.<br />
4.1.5 Stretcher Bar<br />
Stretcher bar shall consist of mild steel flat 25mm x 4.75mm. They shall be secured to<br />
the cleats by steel bolts.<br />
4.2 Erection of Chain Link Fencing<br />
4.2.1 Erection of Posts and Struts<br />
Straining posts L65x65x6, shall be provided at all ends and corner of fences, at changes<br />
in direction or acute variations in level and at intervals not exceeding 18m on straight<br />
lengths of fence. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding<br />
2.5 m.<br />
Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of<br />
the line of fence.<br />
4.2.2 Fixing chain link fencing.<br />
There shall be four evenly spaced rows of line wire. The top wire shall be doubled<br />
making five line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground unless<br />
otherwise noted in the drawings.<br />
Each line wire shall be strained lightly by means of eyebolt strainers or winders at each<br />
straining point.<br />
Each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate post by a wire stirrup passed<br />
through a hole in the posts and secured to the line wire by three <strong>com</strong>plete turns on each<br />
side of the post.<br />
The chain link fencing shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and<br />
secured to each straining post by means of a stretcher bar. On the top line wires shall<br />
be threaded through the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no<br />
meshes in the rows are bypassed by the line wire except where deviation is necessary<br />
at the straining posts. The second top line wire shall be strained in front of the fencing.<br />
The fencing shall be attached to the top and bottom line wires by wire ties spaced<br />
150mm and to the other line wires by wire ties spaced 450mm apart.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0011 Page 3 of 4
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FENCING AND<br />
GATES<br />
The bottom of the fencing shall be treated as follows:<br />
Continuous concrete sill 125mm wide x 225mm high for full length between post shall be<br />
cast with top 25mm above FGL and 25mm below the chain link fencing. Hairpin staples<br />
shall be threaded through the bottom row of mesh at 750mm centers and set in the sill<br />
to a depth of 150mm.<br />
4.2.3 Barbed Wire<br />
Barbed wire shall conform to size Designation 1 as per IS: 278. The weight of the<br />
<strong>com</strong>pleted barbed wire shall be 136 gm/m. The coating on the wire shall be smooth and<br />
relatively free of lumps, globes or points. Wire with excessive roughness blisters,<br />
salammoniac spots shall be rejected. Barbed wire shall be made from two strands of<br />
galvanized, twisted 2.5mm (12 gauges) steel wire with 4 points of barbs. Each barb shall<br />
have two turns, tightening around one or both line wires making altogether four <strong>com</strong>plete<br />
turns. The barb shall be so finished that four points are set and locked at right angles to<br />
each other.<br />
Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as indicated in the drawing.<br />
The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than 18mm.<br />
The spacing of bars shall be 75 mm.<br />
5.0 M.S. Gate<br />
The Technical Specification for the mild steel gates and fixtures shall be as specified in<br />
drawing. For general <strong>specification</strong> for fabrication and erection in steel, refer<br />
<strong>specification</strong>s for steel work.<br />
Gate shall be painted with 2 coats of Synthetic enamel paint over a coat of primer.<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0011 Page 4 of 4
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
S. No. ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY<br />
RATE (Rs)<br />
Figures & Words<br />
AMOUNT<br />
(Rs)<br />
1.00<br />
All work shall be carried out as per Approved for<br />
Construction Drawings, Item description as<br />
specified in this column, <strong>specification</strong>s of work<br />
and standard drawings. In case of conflict<br />
following priority shall be followed. However such<br />
conflict shall be brought to the notice of HPCL/WP<br />
prior to start of work.<br />
1) Approved for Construction Drawings.<br />
2) Item descriptions as specified here.<br />
3) Specifications of work.<br />
4) IS codes.<br />
GENERAL CIVIL, ARCHITECTURE,<br />
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORK FOR SV<br />
STATIONS<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 1 of 7
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS : Design, carrying out geotechnical<br />
survey and topographical survey, detail<br />
engineering, preparing construction and fabrication<br />
drawings, obtaining approval of drawings and designs<br />
from Engineer-in-charge, and construction of all<br />
general <strong>civil</strong> works viz. site grading inlvolving filling and<br />
cutting as per actual site conditions, <strong>com</strong>pound wall,<br />
gates, approach road from existing road, internal<br />
roads, drains, culverts, road crossings for electrical<br />
and instrumentation cables, pavements, footpath,<br />
drinking water system, plumbing work for toilets,<br />
construction of tube well including supply and<br />
installaiton of submersible pump, obtaining approval<br />
for tubewell from the statutory authorities, structural<br />
cage for all valves including preparing desing and<br />
drawing as per actual site details of valves, water<br />
harvesting system, and other miscellaneous works at<br />
SV stations including supply of all labour, material,<br />
equipment etc <strong>com</strong>plete as per <strong>specification</strong>,<br />
preliminary and conceptual drawings, design basis,<br />
approved drawings, codes and standards, other terms<br />
and conditions and as per the direction of Engineer-In-<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 2 of 7
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
Charge. Doc.no. 0435-JH0902-00-CI-SOW-0002),<br />
Specifications, Construction Standards, Drawings and<br />
direction of Engineer-in-Charge.<br />
BUILDING WORKS : Design, detailed engineering,<br />
preparing construction and fabrication drawings,<br />
obtaining approval of drawings and designs from the<br />
Engineer-in-charge, construction of structural and<br />
architectural works for <strong>civil</strong> buildings and other<br />
miscellaneous structures, transportation, erection,<br />
fabrication, painting,finishing etc.,all <strong>com</strong>plete to make<br />
ready for <strong>com</strong>missioning including switchgear & control<br />
room building for all SV stations and other buildings for<br />
SV 4 as indicated in the attached layout plans,<br />
including supply of all labour, material, equipment etc<br />
<strong>com</strong>plete as per <strong>specification</strong>, preliminary and<br />
conceptual drawings, design basis, approved<br />
drawings, codes and standards, other terms and<br />
conditions and as per the direction of Engineer-In-<br />
Charge.<br />
Reference documents:<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 3 of 7
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
(1) Scope of work : Doc. No. 0435-JH0902-00-CI-<br />
SOW-0002<br />
(2) Architectural <strong>specification</strong>: Doc. No. 0435-JH0902-<br />
00-AR-SPC-0001 to 0004<br />
(3) Architectural design basis : Doc. No. 0435-JH0902-<br />
00-AR-BOD-0001<br />
(4) Civil/Structural <strong>specification</strong>: Doc. No. 0435-<br />
JH0902-00-CI-SPC-0001 to 0012 & 0435-JH0902-00-<br />
ST-SPC-0001 to 0002<br />
(5) Civil/Structural design basis : Doc. No. 0435-<br />
JH0902-CI-BOD-0001<br />
(6) SV Station Building Type-1 (SV-01,02,03,05,06)<br />
Station- Arch Drgs(Ground Floor And Roof Plan,<br />
Elevations & Sections, Finishning Schedule) : 0435-<br />
JH0902-70-AR-DRD-0001-001 to 0435-JH0902-70-<br />
AR-DRD-0001-004<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 4 of 7
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
1a<br />
1b<br />
1c<br />
(7) SV Station Building Type-2 SV-04 Station-Arch<br />
Drgs(Ground Floor And Roof Plan, Elevations &<br />
Sections, Finishning Schedule) : 0435-JH0902-70-AR-<br />
DRD-0002-001 to 0435-JH0902-70-AR-DRD-0002-004<br />
(8)General Civil Layout Plan for SV Station (SV-04) :<br />
0435-JH0902-70-AR-DGA-0001-002 & 003 for option-<br />
1 & 2.<br />
(9)General Civil Layout Plan for SV Station (SV-<br />
01,02,03,05,06) (5 Nos) : 0435-JH0902-70-AR-DGA-<br />
0001-001<br />
ALL GENERAL CIVIL WORKS AND BUILDING<br />
WORKS AS ABOVE COMPLETE FOR S.V. STATION<br />
NOS. 1,2,5,6<br />
ALL GENERAL CIVIL WORKS AND BUILDING<br />
WORKS AS ABOVE COMPLETE FOR S.V. STATION<br />
NOS. 3<br />
(i) ALL GENERAL CIVIL WORKS AND BUILDING<br />
WORKS AS ABOVE COMPLETE FOR S.V. STATION<br />
NO. 4 ( as per Option-1)<br />
NO 4.00<br />
NO. 1.00<br />
NO. 1.00<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 5 of 7
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
2.0<br />
(ii) ALL GENERAL CIVIL WORKS AND BUILDING<br />
WORKS AS ABOVE COMPLETE FOR S.V. STATION<br />
NO. 4 ( as per Option-2)<br />
Note- This item will be operated only if the land for the<br />
SV No. 4 required tobe acquired by the contractor.<br />
CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS<br />
FOR SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS<br />
FOR PIPE LINE AT RAMANMANDI,<br />
BATHINDA, AND BAHADURGARH.<br />
SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS : Design, detailed<br />
engineering, preparing construction and fabrication<br />
drawings, obtaining approval of drawings and designs<br />
from the Engineer-in-charge, construction of supports<br />
and foundations, pipe sleepers, transportation,<br />
erection, fabrication, painting,finishing etc.,all <strong>com</strong>plete<br />
for the scrapper launcher and receiving facilites of<br />
cross-country pipeline as indicated in the scope<br />
drawings, including supply of all labour, material,<br />
equipment etc <strong>com</strong>plete as per <strong>specification</strong>,<br />
preliminary and conceptual drawings, design basis,<br />
approved drawings, codes and standards, other terms<br />
NO. 1.00<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 6 of 7
Schedule of Rate For<br />
Ramanmandi- Bahadurgarh Cross<br />
Country Pipeline<br />
CLIENT - HPCL<br />
PROJECT – GGSR PRODUCTS<br />
EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
DOC. NO : 0435-JH0902-70-CI-SOR-0003<br />
2a<br />
and conditions and as per the direction of Engineer-In-<br />
Charge.<br />
All related <strong>civil</strong> and structural works for scrapper<br />
launcher and receiver at Ramanmandi (2nos),<br />
Bahadurgarh(1 no.) and Bathinda(1no).<br />
LS 4.00<br />
BIDDERS STAMP<br />
BIDDERS<br />
SIGNATURE<br />
REV DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED<br />
Page 7 of 7
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Guru Gobind Singh Refinery<br />
Products Evacuation Project<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
Raman Mandi- Bahadurgarh and Raman Mandi-<br />
Bhatinda Multiproduct Pipeline<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002<br />
08 August 09<br />
Sanghi Oxygen Compound<br />
1, Mahal Industrial Estate<br />
Mahakali Caves Road<br />
Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400 093 India<br />
Phone: +91-22-67818000<br />
Fax : +91-22-67818080<br />
www.worleyparsons.<strong>com</strong><br />
© Copyright 2009 <strong>WorleyParsons</strong><br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 1 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
SYNOPSIS<br />
Disclaimer<br />
This report has been prepared on behalf of and for the exclusive use of Hindustan Petroleum<br />
Corporation Limited (HPCL), and is subject to and issued in accordance with the agreement<br />
between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) and <strong>WorleyParsons</strong>.<br />
<strong>WorleyParsons</strong> accepts no liability or responsibility whatsoever for it in respect of any use of or<br />
reliance upon this report by any third party.<br />
Copying this report without the permission of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) or<br />
<strong>WorleyParsons</strong> is not permitted.<br />
PROJECT 435/JH0902 - HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT<br />
(GGSRPEP)<br />
REV DESCRIPTION PREPARED<br />
BY<br />
CHECKED<br />
BY<br />
APPROVED<br />
BY<br />
DATE<br />
CLIENT<br />
APPROVAL<br />
DATE<br />
A<br />
Issued for IDC<br />
S. Saxena V. Thorat J. Wallace<br />
08-Aug- 09<br />
N/A<br />
B<br />
Issued for<br />
Review S. Saxena V. Thorat J. Wallace<br />
10-Aug- 09<br />
11-Sep-<br />
09<br />
C<br />
Issued for<br />
Tender S. Saxena V. Thorat KMN. Pillai<br />
18-Sep-09<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 2 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
1) PURPOSE<br />
The purpose of this document is for uniform understanding and implementation of<br />
quality Management and quality control by contractor during construction. The<br />
management of quality shall also cover co-ordination, review, approval audit and<br />
proper documentation of the works performed. Indicative Inspection and Test Plans<br />
(ITPs) are forming part of this document as attachments.<br />
2) SCOPE<br />
This document shall be applicable for all construction works to be followed by<br />
contractors as well as WP for achieving overall objective of quality of various<br />
activities during Construction.<br />
3) CONSTRUCTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
The Contractor shall establish and maintain an effective Quality Management<br />
System (QMS). Contractor’s QMS will be reviewed and approved by WP/HPCL<br />
before proceeding with the job. The QMS shall consist of plans, procedures, and the<br />
organisation necessary to provide material, equipment, and workmanship that<br />
<strong>com</strong>ply with the Contract documentation. The system shall cover operations both onsite<br />
and off-site, and shall be aligned with the proposed sequence of work.<br />
The Contractor will prepare a Quality Plan <strong>com</strong>pliant with the requirements set-out in<br />
the Contract documents. The plan shall supplement the Contractor’s approved<br />
Quality Manual. The Contractor’s detailed Quality plan is required to be submitted for<br />
approval prior to <strong>com</strong>mencement of any work.<br />
The Quality Plan shall provide controls for ensuring that the procurement, shipping,<br />
handling, fabrication, installation, cleaning, inspection, construction, testing, storage,<br />
examination, <strong>com</strong>missioning, and required modifications of all materials, equipment,<br />
and elements of the work <strong>com</strong>ply with the requirements of the Contract documents<br />
and that all materials incorporated in the work will perform satisfactorily for the<br />
purpose intended.<br />
Contractor’s Quality Plan will be reviewed to ensure that the following are captured<br />
as part of the Project specific quality processes and that the Contractor takes into<br />
consideration all the quality control requirements of the Project:<br />
• Equipment identification or item reference numbers given on drawings shall,<br />
where practical, be utilised as the basis for identification and verification of<br />
purchased or produced material. Where practical the identification mark shall be<br />
retained as the basis for identification during storage and installation.<br />
Identification shall be controlled in accordance with the project procedures.<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 3 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
• Material control will be undertaken in accordance with the project procedures<br />
and/or Project requirements to ensure the correct material is received, handled<br />
and stored.<br />
• Traceability requirements for equipment and material used for the project shall be<br />
based on quality records kept during the progress of the project. These records<br />
will be maintained in accordance with the Project procedures.<br />
• The site Contractor will maintain a calibration register for all inspection,<br />
measuring and test equipment used on site. The Contractor shall ensure that all<br />
measuring and test equipment used by subcontractors is fit for purpose and in a<br />
known state of calibration prior to use. To facilitate calibration control, a register<br />
shall be maintained by the Contractor’s Construction Quality Coordinator in<br />
accordance with the Project requirements.<br />
• Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs) and/or Manufacturing & Test Quality Plans<br />
(MTQP) will be used throughout the Procurement, Construction and<br />
Commissioning phases. ITPs/MTQPs, record sheets and/or marked-up<br />
drawings, as appropriate, shall provide the basis for indicating inspection and test<br />
status. Specific ITPs/MTQPs will be developed by the Contractor and approved<br />
by WP prior to being used for non-standard activities.<br />
• Contractor shall maintain CTE/ Quality register given by WP during job stage.<br />
• WP site QA/QC Engineers shall ensure that vendor shop and field inspection,<br />
hydro-testing inspection, painting inspection, radiography, etc. are <strong>com</strong>pleted<br />
jointly by the WP QA/QC and Contractor in accordance with the approved<br />
ITP/MTQP and Project requirements.<br />
Contractor shall not progress to subsequent operations until the record of inspection<br />
has been endorsed by the Contractor’s Quality Coordinator and WP site QA/QC<br />
Engineer or Resident Manager or representative as nominated in the relevant<br />
ITP/MTQP.<br />
4) DOCUMENTATION<br />
The documentation plays a very important role in quality management including<br />
quality control. Necessary documentation shall be maintained by Contractor during<br />
<strong>com</strong>pletion of project and handed over to WP. Area(s) wherever WP personnel are<br />
directly involved, particularly in witness and hold point, the copies of the same shall<br />
also be provided to them on inspection of those activities. The documentation shall<br />
include the following but not limited to:-<br />
(i) Approved Quality Assurance Plan.<br />
(ii) Approved inspection and Test Plans.<br />
(iii) Inspection and test documents covering.<br />
a) Manufacturer’s Test Certificate.<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 4 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
b) Material Receipt Report including Inspection Release Note applicable and<br />
site inspection and acceptance report on quality and quantity of material.<br />
c) Site test/laboratory test report reviewed by contractor for acceptance vis-à<br />
vis to contract/code requirements of materials/ including PMI report at<br />
warehouse.<br />
d) In process verification reports of contractor representative to WP as<br />
applicable.<br />
e) Final verification report including any test checks done for <strong>com</strong>pliance.<br />
f) As-built vis-à-vis to contract/drawings including tolerances.<br />
g) As-built for erection.<br />
h) Non conformance resolution raised by contractor//WP.<br />
i) Deviation approval by WP.<br />
j) Waiver / approval by WP in case there is variation from contract/drawings.<br />
5) CONSTRUTION QUALITY AUDIT<br />
The WP will carry out a Construction Quality Audit of the project facility near Mechanical<br />
<strong>com</strong>pletion of the Project by independent group of WP personnel.<br />
6) GENERAL NOTE<br />
Before start of work, the contractor shall develop and submit for approval of HPCL /<br />
WPEL, a detailed stagewise micro level Inspection & Test Plan depending upon the<br />
construction Process/technology to be deployed.<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 5 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
LEGEND<br />
HP : Hold Point:<br />
A point which requires inspection/verification and acceptance by HPCL/WP before<br />
any further processing is permitted.<br />
The Contractor shall not process the activity /item beyond a Hold Point without<br />
written approval by HPCL/WP except where prior written permission for further<br />
processing is available.<br />
W : Witness Point:<br />
An activity which requires witnessing by HPCL/WP when the activity is performed<br />
After proper notification has been provided (notification modalities and period shall be<br />
finalised before hand) the contractor is not obliged to hold further processing if<br />
HPCL/WP is not available to witness the activity or does not provide <strong>com</strong>ments<br />
before the date notified. Basis of acceptance shall be as per relevant technical<br />
<strong>specification</strong>.<br />
Rw : Review of Contractor’s Documentation by WPEL<br />
S : Surveillance Inspection by HPCL/WP:<br />
Monitoring or making observations to verify whether or not material/items or services<br />
conform to specified requirements. Surveillance activities may include audit<br />
inspections, witness of testing, review of quality documentation & records, personnel<br />
qualifications etc.<br />
WC : 100 % Examination by Contractor.<br />
(Prime responsibility for execution of the inspection is with the Contractor. HPCL/WP only<br />
monitors Contractor’s performance)<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 6 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
7.0 ATTACHMENTS<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 7 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 8 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 9 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 10 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 11 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 12 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 13 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 14 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 15 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 16 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 17 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 18 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 19 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
D PAINTING<br />
1) SURFACE PREPARATION Wc W<br />
2) PROPORTIONING & MIXING OF PAINTS Wc W<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 20 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
3) PAINT APPLICATION & THICKNESS Wc S<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 21 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 22 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 23 of 24
HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED (HPCL)<br />
HPCL GURU GOBIND SINGH REFINERY PRODUCTS EVACUATION PROJECT (GGSRPEP)<br />
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM - CIVIL<br />
Doc. No.: 0435-JH0902-00-CI-ITP-0002 Page 24 of 24